yellowblue The 1999 Chevrolet Cavalier Owner’s Manual

1-1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “SRS” system. 2-1 Features and Controls This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle. 3-1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system. 4-1 Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions. 5-1 Problems on the Road This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc. 6-1 Service and Appearance Care Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good. 7-1 Maintenance Schedule This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use. 8-1 Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications. It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-10. 9-1 Index Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read. i yellowblue

We support voluntary technician certification.

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name CAVALIER are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual. French Language Manual: Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez owner can use it. votre concessionaire ou au: DGN Marketing Services Ltd. 1577 Meyerside Dr. Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9

Litho in U.S.A. ECopyright General Motors Corporation 1998 Part No. 10409484 A First Edition All Rights Reserved ii yellowblue The Heritage of Chevrolet The dynamic William C. “Billy” Durant shifted gears from making carriages to making cars, forming half the team that gave birth to Chevrolet.

Welcome to the largest vehicle backed by a proud worn the Chevrolet marque. automotive family in the history of performance and That kind of reception from world -- the family of Chevrolet value. Since the first “Classic auto owners is unmatched by owners. You have selected a Six” rolled off the line in 1912, any other car manufacturer in vehicle designed, engineered more than 110 million the world. and crafted by teamwork, a Chevrolet cars and trucks have

Louis Chevrolet, the other half of the team, at the wheel of his experimental “Classic Six,” which entered production in 1912. That year 2999 vehicles were produced. iii yellowblue

The Chevrolet blend of created for the pleasure of the into each vehicle. It’s not value and performance has open road. surprising that for 80 years become an American Every decade, Chevrolet “Genuine Chevrolet” has been tradition -- whether bred for has reinforced its heritage America’s automobile. the racetrack like the legendary of affordable performance We’re proud to continue that Corvette and Camaro, or with quality and value crafted heritage in your Chevrolet,

The legacy of America’s favorite sportscar In 1932 Chevrolet began in 1953, when 319 hand-assembled introduced the white Corvettes Synchro-Mesh launched the transmission and first use of a offered a host of fiberglass body in accessories -- including a production car. such niceties as a clock! iv yellowblue

The 1957 Chevy started a romance with the American public -- and was powered by an available fuel-injected V8.

and we are pledged to make ownership of your Chevrolet an enjoyable and rewarding experience.

60’s automotive excitement included Chevrolet landmarks like the Corvette Sting Ray, the sporty Camaro, and Your new Chevrolet continues a tradition of quality and value. powerplants like the legendary 327 V8.

v yellowblue

How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning CAUTION: to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and These mean there is something that could hurt controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find you or other people. that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly. In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then Index we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the A good place to look for what you need is the Index in hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in others could be hurt. the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it. You will also find a circle Safety Warnings and Symbols with a slash through it in this book. This safety You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. symbol means “Don’t,” We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you “Don’t do this” or “Don’t about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore let this happen.” the warning.

vi yellowblue

Vehicle Damage Warnings In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage Also, in this book you will find these notices: would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help NOTICE: avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see These mean there is something that could CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. damage your vehicle. You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

vii yellowblue

Vehicle Symbols These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.

For example, These symbols These symbols These symbols These symbols Here are some these symbols are important have to do with are on some of are used on other symbols are used on an for you and your lamps: your controls: warning and you may see: original battery: your passengers indicator lights: whenever your vehicle is MASTER WINDSHIELD CAUTION driven: LIGHTING WIPER POSSIBLE SWITCH ENGINE FUSE INJURY COOLANT TEMP DOOR LOCK TURN PROTECT WINDSHIELD UNLOCK SIGNALS EYES BY WASHER BATTERY LIGHTER SHIELDING CHARGING PARKING SYSTEM CAUSTIC LAMPS WINDSHIELD BATTERY FASTEN HORN DEFROSTER ACID COULD SEAT BRAKE CAUSE BELTS HAZARD BURNS WARNING FLASHER REAR COOLANT SPEAKER AVOID WINDOW SPARKS OR POWER DEFOGGER FLAMES DAYTIME WINDOW RUNNING ENGINE OIL LAMPS PRESSURE FUEL SPARK OR FLAME VENTILATING COULD FAN EXPLODE AIR BAG FOG LAMPS ANTI-LOCK BATTERY BRAKES viii yellowblue Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.

1-2 Seats and Seat Controls 1-33 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children 1-8 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone and Small Adults 1-12 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About 1-36 Center Passenger Position Safety Belts -- and the Answers 1-37 Children 1-13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1-40 Child Restraints 1-14 Driver Position 1-52 Larger Children 1-22 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1-55 Safety Belt Extender 1-23 Right Front Passenger Position 1-55 Checking Your Restraint Systems 1-23 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 1-55 Replacing Restraint System Parts 1-29 Rear Seat Passengers After a Crash

1- 1-1 yellowblue

Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust them -- and also about reclining seatbacks and head restraints. Manual Front Seats

CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you Lift the lever on the front of the driver’s seat to unlock don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when it. Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release the the vehicle is not moving. lever and try to move the seat with your body, to make sure the seat is locked into place. Your vehicle will be equipped with one of the following passenger seat adjusters.

1-2 yellowblue

If your vehicle is not equipped with easy entry seats, If your vehicle is equipped with easy entry seats, this is your passenger seat adjuster looks like this. Slide the your front passenger seat adjuster. Pull up on the lever at lever under the passenger’s seat to the right to unlock it. the front of the passenger’s seat up to unlock it. Slide the Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release the seat to a comfortable position. Then release the lever lever and try to move the seat with your body, to make and try to move the seat with your body, to make sure sure the seat is locked into place. the seat is locked into place. Manual Lumbar Support (If Equipped) The manual lumbar support control is located at the front of the driver’s seat, toward the right. Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the amount of support to your lower back.

1-3 yellowblue

Reclining Front Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outer side of the seat and move the seatback to where you want it. But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle Release the lever to lock the seatback. Pull up on the is moving. lever and the seat will go to an upright position.

1-4 yellowblue

Head Restraints CAUTION: Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle Seatback Latches (2-Door Models) up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this. The front seatback folds The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it forward to let people get won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in into the back seat. front of you. In a crash you could go into it, To fold a front seatback receiving neck or other injuries. forward, lift the latch The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the located on the lower back belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt side of the seatback. Then forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. the seat will fold forward. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.

1-5 yellowblue

When you return the seatback to its original position, Easy Entry Seat (If Equipped) make sure the seatback is locked. The latch must be down for the seat to work properly. CAUTION:

CAUTION: If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked, it can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the person If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move sitting there could be injured. After you’ve used forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could it, be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat cause injury to the person sitting there. Always to be sure it is locked. press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked. The right front seat of some two-door vehicles makes it easy to get in and out of the rear seat. D Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and the whole seat will slide forward. D Move the right front seatback to its original position after someone gets into the rear seat area. Then move the seat rearward until it locks. D Tilt the seatback completely forward again to get out.

1-6 yellowblue

Rear Seats Folding the Rear Seat

To close the seat, push the seatback up to its original position. Check to ensure the seatback is in its original position To open the fold-down rear seat, pull forward on the and securely latched by pulling forward on the top seat tab. of the seatback. Move any obstructions in the trunk compartment.

1-7 yellowblue

Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts CAUTION: properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, (SRS), or air bag system. people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not CAUTION: equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear safety belt properly. a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the Your vehicle has a light that vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously comes on as a reminder to injured or killed. In the same crash, you might buckle up. (See “Safety not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.) safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.

1-8 yellowblue

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to Why Safety Belts Work wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a it goes. crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.

1-9 yellowblue

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn’t stop.

1-10 yellowblue

The person keeps going until stopped by something. or the instrument panel ... In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

1-11 yellowblue

Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts -- and the Answers Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are or the safety belts! supplemental systems only; so they work with With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, system ever offered for sale has required the use of and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air safety belts make such good sense. bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.

1-12 yellowblue

Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from How to Wear Safety Belts Properly home, why should I wear safety belts? Adults A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and This part is only for people of adult size. your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver Be aware that there are special things to know about doesn’t protect you from things beyond your safety belts and children. And there are different rules control, such as bad drivers. for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of called “Children.” Follow those rules for home. And the greatest number of serious injuries everyone’s protection. and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your (65 km/h). vehicle has. Safety belts are for everyone. We’ll start with the driver position.

1-13 yellowblue

Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system. Lap-Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly. 1. Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

1-14 yellowblue

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt 5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. the belt. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-15 yellowblue

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-16 yellowblue

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster (4-Door Models) To move it down, squeeze the release button and move Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move adjuster to the height that is right for you. the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without squeezing the release button to make sure it has locked into position. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

1-17 yellowblue

Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way.

1-18 yellowblue

Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-19 yellowblue

Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-20 yellowblue

Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-21 yellowblue

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-22 yellowblue

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more CAUTION: likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you Right Front Passenger Position have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position” inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air earlier in this section. bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All air bags -- even Next Generation air Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) bags -- are designed to work with safety belts, This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to (SRS) or air bag system. work only in moderate to severe crashes where Your vehicle has “Next Generation” frontal air the front of your vehicle hits something. They bags -- one air bag for the driver and another air aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear, bag for the right front passenger. side or low-speed frontal crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants, Next Generation air Next Generation frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bags may provide less protection in frontal air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very crashes than more forceful air bags have quickly if they are to do their job and comply with provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle federal regulations. should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or not there’s an air bag for that person. Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system:

1-23 yellowblue

CAUTION: CAUTION: (Continued) adults, but not for young children and infants. Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating bag system is designed for them. Young children air bag, as you would be if you were leaning and infants need the protection that a child forward, it could seriously injure you. This is true restraint system can provide. Always secure even with Next Generation frontal air bags. children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see Safety belts help keep you in position before and the part of this manual called “Children” and see during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, the caution labels on the sunvisors and the right even with Next Generation air bags. The driver front passenger’s safety belt. should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which CAUTION: shows AIR BAG.

Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. This is true even though your vehicle has The system checks the air bag electrical system for Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags plus malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index CAUTION: (Continued) for more information.

1-24 yellowblue

How the Air Bag System Works

The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. Where are the air bags? The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

1-25 yellowblue

When should an air bag inflate? CAUTION: An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate If something is between an occupant and an air only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is might force the object into that person. The path about 9 to 14 mph (14 to 23 km/h). The threshold level of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that put anything between an occupant and an air it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such steering wheel hub or on or near any other air as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The bag covering. air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts.

1-26 yellowblue

What makes an air bag inflate? What will you see after an air bag inflates? In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing that some people may not even realize the air bag system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag -- steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that right front passenger. come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming How does an air bag restrain? from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions, doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or from being even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection leaving the vehicle. provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.

1-27 yellowblue

D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing CAUTION: and diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air. when the sensors are activated and driver’s safety This dust could cause breathing problems for belt usage at deployment. people with a history of asthma or other D Let only qualified technicians work on your air breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the bag system. Improper service can mean that your vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer If you have breathing problems but can’t get out for service. of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. NOTICE:

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag. work properly. You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they bag module and the instrument panel for the inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system break the air bag coverings. won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

1-28 yellowblue

If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water -- such as water up to the carpeting or higher -- or if water enters CAUTION: your vehicle and soaks the carpet, the air bag controller can be soaked and ruined. If this ever happens, and then you start your vehicle, the damage could make the air bags For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is inflate, even if there’s no crash. You would have to replace turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air the air bags as well as the sensors and related parts. If your bag can still inflate during improper service. You vehicle is ever in a flood, or if it’s exposed to water that can be injured if you are close to an air bag when soaks the carpet, you can avoid needless repair costs by it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are turning off the vehicle immediately and disconnecting the probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to battery cables. Don’t let anyone start the vehicle under any follow proper service procedures, and make sure circumstances. See your dealer for service. the person performing work for you is qualified Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle to do so. Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the air bag system in several places The air bag system does not need regular maintenance. around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your Rear Seat Passengers dealer and the Cavalier Service Manual have It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are Owner Publications” in the Index. wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

1-29 yellowblue

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

Lap-Shoulder Belt The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

1-30 yellowblue

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the 3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it. end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-31 yellowblue

likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less

1-32 yellowblue

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head. There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-33 yellowblue

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of 2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic the seatback and the interior body to remove the cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide guide from its storage clip. over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

1-34 yellowblue

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. 4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions” on top. earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed. 1-35 yellowblue

Center Passenger Position Lap Belt

When you sit in the center seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

1-36 yellowblue

Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. Smaller Children and Babies

CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until or killed. This is true even though your vehicle the belt is snug. has Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, for adults, but not for young children and see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned Young children and infants need the protection so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle.

1-37 yellowblue

Infants need complete support, including support for the CAUTION: head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in a Smaller children and babies should always be rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the restrained in a child or infant restraint. The crash forces can be distributed across the strongest instructions for the restraint will say whether it is part of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby the right type and size for your child. A very should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint. young child’s hip bones are so small that a This is so important that many hospitals today won’t regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the infant restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply motor vehicle. force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint.

1-38 yellowblue

CAUTION: (Continued)

at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold. Secure the baby in an infant restraint.

CAUTION:

Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash CAUTION: (Continued)

1-39 yellowblue

Child Restraints Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints. Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints are available in four basic types. When selecting a child restraint, take into consideration not only the child’s weight and size, but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.

An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed, make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle.

1-40 yellowblue

A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant restraints are designed for infants of up to about 20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head, neck and body can have the support they need in a frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two parts -- the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable.

1-41 yellowblue

A forward-facing child restraint (C-E) positions a child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These forward-facing restraints are designed to help protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four years of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is designed to be used either as a rear-facing infant seat or a forward-facing child seat.

1-42 yellowblue

A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children who are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs. (18 to 27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about four to eight years of age. A booster seat is designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster seats with shields use lap-only belts; however, booster seats without shields use lap-shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window.

1-43 yellowblue

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it CAUTION: will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may seriously injured or killed if the right front find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags. This the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. is because the back of the rear-facing child The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint would be very close to the inflating air restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint manual and the child restraint instructions are important, in a rear seat. so if either one of these is not available, obtain a You may secure a forward-facing child restraint replacement copy from the manufacturer. in the right front seat, but before you do, always Where to Put the Restraint move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in Accident statistics show that children are safer if they a rear seat. are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear-facing Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why: restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.

1-44 yellowblue

Top Strap If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. If you have a convertible, don’t use a restraint like that in your vehicle because the top strap anchor cannot be installed properly. You shouldn’t use this type of restraint without anchoring the top strap. If your vehicle is not a convertible and you need to have an anchor installed, you can ask your dealer to put one in for you. This work will be done for you free of charge. If you want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell you how to do it.

Canadian law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored.

1-45 yellowblue

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. 3. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions neck, put it behind the child restraint. will show you how.

1-46 yellowblue

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using safety belt quickly if you ever had to. a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

1-47 yellowblue

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position

You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure 1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch the child in the child restraint when and as the plate and pulling it along the belt. instructions say. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

1-48 yellowblue

5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-49 yellowblue

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a Front Seat Position forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat. You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never “Seats” in the Index.) put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why: 2. Put the restraint on the seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or CAUTION: around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.

1-50 yellowblue

4. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the neck, put it behind the child restraint. safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-51 yellowblue

Larger Children

6. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-52 yellowblue

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the CAUTION: safety belts properly. D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in Never do this. a crash. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The D Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a people who are. crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to place the child in the center seat position, the one that has only a lap belt.

1-53 yellowblue

CAUTION:

Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

1-54 yellowblue

Safety Belt Extender Replacing Restraint System Parts If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you After a Crash should use it. If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts? But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the during a more severe crash, then you need new belts. extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs to the regular safety belt. may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision. Checking Your Restraint Systems If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and this section. anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.) 1-55 yellowblue

✍ NOTES

1-56 yellowblue Section 2 Features and Controls

Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.

2-2 Keys 2-32 Parking Over Things That Burn 2-4 Door Locks 2-32 Engine Exhaust 2-6 Remote Keyless Entry (If Equipped) 2-33 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked 2-11 Theft (Automatic Transaxle) 2-12 PasslockR 2-34 Windows 2-13 New Vehicle “Break-In” 2-35 Tilt Wheel (If Equipped) 2-13 Ignition Positions 2-35 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever 2-16 Starting Your Engine 2-41 Exterior Lamps 2-18 Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped) 2-44 Interior Lamps 2-20 Automatic Transaxle Operation 2-46 Mirrors 2-25 Manual Transaxle Operation 2-47 Storage Compartments 2-28 Parking Brake 2-47 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped) 2-29 Shifting Into PARK (P) 2-48 Sun Visors (Automatic Transaxle Only) 2-49 Sunroof (If Equipped) 2-31 Shifting Out of PARK (P) 2-49 Convertible Top (If Equipped) (Automatic Transaxle Only) 2-60 The Instrument Panel -- Your 2-31 Parking Your Vehicle Information System (Manual Transaxle Models Only) 2-62 Instrument Panel Clusters 2- 2-65 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators 2-1 yellowblue

Keys

CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-2 yellowblue

One key is used for the If you need a new key, contact your Chevrolet dealer ignition, the doors and all who can obtain the correct key code. In an emergency, other locks. call the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program at 1-800-CHEV-USAR (1-800-243-8872). In Canada call 1-800-268-6800.

NOTICE:

Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock key tag from the key, and gives it to the first owner. your key inside. You may even have to damage Each tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the extra key. tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you’ll be able to have a new one made easily using the tag.

2-3 yellowblue

Door Locks To lock the door from the inside, push the locking lever forward. CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Passengers -- especially children -- can easily open the doors and fall out. When a door is locked, the inside handle won’t open it. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle. To unlock the door, pull the locking lever backward. This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. Use your key to unlock your vehicle from the outside. You can also use the optional remote keyless entry system to unlock your vehicle. See “Remote Keyless Entry System” in the Index.

2-4 yellowblue

Power Door Locks (If Equipped) Rear Door Security Lock (4-Door Models) You can lock or unlock all Your vehicle is equipped doors of your vehicle from with rear door security the driver’s or front locks that help prevent passenger’s door lock passengers from opening switch. the rear doors of your vehicle from the inside.

Push the lower portion of the switch to lock your doors. Push the upper portion of the switch to unlock your doors. To Use One of These Locks The lever on each rear door works only that door’s lock. 1. Use a key to move the lock all the way up. It won’t lock (or unlock) all of the doors -- that’s a 2. Close the door. safety feature. 3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock. The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use.

2-5 yellowblue

To Open a Rear Door With the Security Lock Remote Keyless Entry (If Equipped) 1. Unlock the door from the inside. If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and unlock 2. Then open the door from the outside. your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or transmitter supplied with your vehicle. older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to open the rear door from the inside. You should let adults and In addition, the system illuminates the interior lamps for older children know how to cancel the locks. a set period of time. To Cancel the Rear Door Lock The remote keyless entry system consists of a 1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the door receiver, which is located in from the outside. the vehicle, and two hand 2. Use a key to move the lock all the way down. held transmitters. 3. Do the same for the other rear door. The rear door lock will now work normally. Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle, open your door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out and close the door. Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

2-6 yellowblue

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry (2) this device must accept any interference received, system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have including interference that may cause to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to undesired operation. work, try this: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. D Check to determine if battery replacement or Operation is subject to the following two conditions: resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this that follow. device must accept any interference received, including D Check the distance. You may be too far from your interference that may cause undesired operation of vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy the device. or snowy weather. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be authorized service facility could void authorization to blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or use this equipment. right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again. D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.

2-7 yellowblue

Operation Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle The following functions are available with the remote Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to keyless entry system: prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. LOCK: All doors will automatically lock when the If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be LOCK button on the transmitter is pressed. The interior purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any lamps stay on for a few seconds after all of the doors remaining transmitters with you when you go to your are closed. dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters UNLOCK: The driver’s door will unlock automatically must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the when the UNLOCK button on the transmitter is pressed. new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your If the UNLOCK button is pressed again within five vehicle. Each vehicle can have only two transmitters seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The interior matched to it. lamps will stay on for approximately 40 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. You can match your transmitter to as many 1999 General Motors vehicles as you own, as long as they Trunk Release: The trunk will unlock anytime when have the same remote keyless entry system. Contact the vehicle symbol on the transmitter is pressed and the your dealer for assistance with this. ignition is OFF. The interior lamps will come on for 40 seconds or until the ignition is turned to ON.

2-8 yellowblue

Battery Replacement Replacing the Battery in the Remote Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless Keyless Entry System Transmitter entry transmitter should last about two years. You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the battery.

NOTICE:

When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the transmitter: 1. Use a small coin or flathead screwdriver to separate the bottom half from the top half of the transmitter. 2. Remove the battery and replace it with the new one. Make sure the positive (+) side of the battery faces down. For battery replacement, use a three-volt battery, type CR2032, or equivalent.

2-9 yellowblue

3. Read the instructions inside the case. Trunk 4. Put the two halves back together. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water won’t get in. 5. Check the operation of the transmitter with your CAUTION: vehicle. If the transmitter does not work, try resynchronizing the transmitter with the receiver. It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can Resynchronization come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell Your remote keyless entry system is equipped with a CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. security system that prevents anyone from recording and If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if playing back your signal. The transmitter does not send electrical wiring or other cable connections must the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver will pass through the seal between the body and the not respond to a signal that has been sent to it more trunk lid: than once. D Make sure all other windows are shut. To resynchronize your transmitter and receiver, follow D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling these directions: system to its highest speed with the setting 1. Stand close to your vehicle. on any airflow selection except MAX. That 2. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on will force outside air into your vehicle. See the transmitter at the same time. “Comfort Controls” in the Index. D If you have air outlets on or under the 3. Hold the buttons for at least five seconds. During this time, the doors should lock and unlock once. instrument panel, open them all the way. This confirms the resynchronization. If the doors do See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. not lock and unlock, see your dealer for service.

2-10 yellowblue

Remote Trunk Release (If Equipped) Key in the Ignition Pull upward on the remote If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an release handle, located on easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so the floor near the left side of don’t do it. the driver’s seat, to release When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, the trunk lid. you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this. Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition. If you take the key with you, and you have an automatic transaxle, it will be locked. And remember to lock the doors. Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your Theft vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight. Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Put them in a storage area, or take them with you. Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.

2-11 yellowblue

Parking Lots During normal operation, the THEFT SYSTEM light will go off approximately five seconds after the key is If you park in a lot where someone will be watching turned to the ON ignition position. your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys. But what if you have to leave your key? If the engine stalls and the THEFT SYSTEM light D flashes, wait until the light stops flashing before trying If possible, park in a busy, well lit area. to restart the engine. Remember to release the key from D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your START as soon as the engine starts. trunk or glove box. Be sure to close and lock the If the engine is running and the THEFT SYSTEM light storage area. comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if you D Close all windows. turn the engine off. However, your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your D Lock all the doors except the driver’s. dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this D If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system, time. You may also want to check the fuses (see “Fuses take the transmitter with you. and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). See your dealer for service. PasslockR In an emergency, call the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock Center at 1-800-CHEV-USAR (1-800-243-8872). theft-deterrent system. In Canada call 1-800-268-6800. Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.

2-12 yellowblue

New Vehicle “Break-In” Ignition Positions

NOTICE: CAUTION:

Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition “break-in.” But it will perform better in the long key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or run if you follow these guidelines: others could be injured or even killed. They could D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or operate power windows or other controls or even slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km). make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in Don’t make full-throttle starts. the vehicle with children. D Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings. D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for more information.

2-13 yellowblue

LOCK (B): This is the only position in which you can remove the key. This locks your steering wheel, ignition, shift lever and transaxle. OFF (C): This position unlocks the steering wheel, ignition and transaxle, but does not send electrical power to any accessories. The instrument cluster and the automatic transaxle gear shift indicator have electrical power while in OFF. Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed or towed, but never try to push-start your vehicle. A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s door when the ignition is off and the key is in the ignition. RUN (D): This is a position to which the switch returns after you start your engine and release the switch. The With the ignition key in the ignition switch, you can turn switch stays in RUN when the engine is running. But the switch to five positions. even when the engine is not running, you can use RUN ACCESSORY (A): In this position, you can operate to operate your electrical power accessories, and to your electrical power accessories. Press in the ignition display some instrument panel warning lights. switch as you turn it toward you. START (E): This position starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will return to RUN for normal driving. Note that even if the engine is not running, the positions ACCESSORY and RUN are on positions that allow you to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio.

2-14 yellowblue

Key Release Button (Manual Transaxle) CAUTION: The ignition key cannot be removed from the ignition On manual transaxle vehicles, turning the key to unless the key release LOCK will lock the steering column and result in button is used. a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while the vehicle is moving.

NOTICE: To remove the key, turn the key to OFF. While pressing If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t the key release button in, turn the key to LOCK. Pull the turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if key straight out. so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

2-15 yellowblue

Starting Your Engine Starting Your 2.2 Liter L4 Engine Automatic Transaxle 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a engine gets warm. safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. NOTICE:

NOTICE: Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your Chevrolet drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can is moving. If you do, you could damage the damage your starter motor. Wait about transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your 15 seconds between each try to help avoid vehicle is stopped. draining your battery or damaging your starter.

Manual Transaxle 2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if floor and holding it there as you hold the key in the clutch pedal is not all the way down -- that’s a START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts safety feature. briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.

2-16 yellowblue

Starting Your 2.4 Liter L4 Engine NOTICE: 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let Your engine is designed to work with the go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical engine warms up. parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, NOTICE: your engine might not perform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see Holding your key in START for longer than the part of this manual that tells how to do it 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can Your Vehicle” in the Index. damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.

2. If the engine doesn’t start right away, and if the weather is very cold (below -20_ F or -29_ C), push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down while you turn the key to START. Do this until the engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of the key.

2-17 yellowblue

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped) stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine still won’t start or starts briefly but then stops again, repeat step 1 or 2, depending on temperature. When the engine starts, release the key and the accelerator pedal.

NOTICE:

Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way 2.2L L4 Engine the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

2-18 yellowblue

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. On vehicles with a 2.2L L4 engine, the electrical cord is located near the engine oil dipstick. On vehicles with a 2.4L L4 engine, the electrical cord is located in front of the engine coolant surge tank on the passenger’s side. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

CAUTION: 2.4L L4 Engine Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet _ _ In very cold weather, 0 F (-18 C) or colder, the engine could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and kind of extension cord could overheat and cause better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of cord into a properly grounded three prong four hours prior to starting your vehicle. - 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

2-19 yellowblue

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and Automatic Transaxle Operation store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could Your vehicle may be equipped with a three-speed be damaged. automatic transaxle or a four-speed automatic transaxle. The shift lever is located on the console between How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged the seats. in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of There are six different positions for the shift lever on the trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact three-speed automatic and seven positions for the your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your four-speed automatic transaxles. While PARK (P), vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that REVERSE (R) and NEUTRAL (N) operate identically particular area. for both transaxles, the forward gear positions represent different gearing and operation. See “Forward Gears (3-Speed)” or “Forward-Gears (4-Speed)” later in this section.

Three-Speed Automatic Transaxle 2-20 yellowblue

CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your Four-Speed Automatic Transaxle vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’s level ground, always set your parking brake and the best position to use when you start your engine move the shift lever to PARK (P). because your vehicle can’t move easily. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

2-21 yellowblue

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t starting the engine. Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to fully apply your moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out Note that a 3-speed transaxle cannot be towed with all of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever -- push the four wheels on the ground. shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and also release the shift lever button on floor shift console models as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift CAUTION: lever into the gear you wish. (Press the shift lever button before moving the shift lever.) See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index. Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very NOTICE: rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transaxle. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. NOTICE: To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see “Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index. of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.

2-22 yellowblue

Forward Gears (3-Speed) FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but selector lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. shift into first gear until the vehicle is going It can help control your speed as you go down steep slowly enough. mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on. NOTICE:

NOTICE: If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid 25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph object. You could damage your transaxle. Also, if (90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle. you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your Use DRIVE (D) as much as possible. Don’t shift vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This into SECOND (2) unless you are going slower could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your your engine. vehicle in position on a hill.

2-23 yellowblue

Forward Gears (4-Speed) AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for NOTICE: normal driving with the four-speed automatic transaxle. If you need more power for passing, and you’re: Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than 25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph D Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your (90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle. accelerator pedal about halfway down. Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your THIRD (3) as much as possible. Don’t shift into accelerator all the way down. SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel your engine. economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can D When driving on hilly, winding roads. use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the D When going down a steep hill. selector lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but slowly enough. lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on.

2-24 yellowblue

Manual Transaxle Operation NOTICE: 5-Speed If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transaxle. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.

2-25 yellowblue

This is your shift pattern. SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to Here’s how to operate your transaxle: NEUTRAL (N). FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as idle your engine. you press the accelerator pedal. You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).

2-26 yellowblue

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch Up-Shift Light (Manual Transaxle) pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. If you have a manual transaxle, you have a SHIFT light. This light will NOTICE: show you when to shift to the next higher gear for the Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is best fuel economy. stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving could damage your transaxle. When this light comes on, you can shift to the next higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, shift when the light comes on. for parking your vehicle. While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on Shift Speeds and off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift. CAUTION:

If you skip more than one gear when you downshift, you could lose control of your vehicle. You could injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down more than one gear at a time when you down shift.

2-27 yellowblue

Parking Brake To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press the release button. Hold the release button in as you move the brake lever all the way down.

NOTICE:

Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle.

The parking brake lever is located between the bucket seats. To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on.

2-28 yellowblue

Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic Transaxle Only)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a 2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position Trailer” in the Index. like this: D Hold in the button on the lever 1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the D Push the lever all the way toward the front of parking brake. your vehicle. 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-29 yellowblue

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle) Running (Automatic Transaxle Only) If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in CAUTION: the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift engine running. Your vehicle could move into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) the Index. with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of overheat and even catch fire. You or others could PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another engine running unless you have to. vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing the button. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

2-30 yellowblue

Shifting Out of PARK (P) If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into (Automatic Transaxle Only) PARK (P), as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. (Press the shift lever button before moving the shift lever.) CAUTION: If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P), try this: Before shifting out of PARK (P) you must fully apply your regular brakes. Your vehicle can roll. 1. Turn the key to OFF. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4. can move suddenly. You or others could be 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N). injured. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. 4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want. 5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can. Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular brakes Parking Your Vehicle before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index. (Manual Transaxle Models Only) Before you get out of your vehicle, put your manual transaxle in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parking brake.

2-31 yellowblue

Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust

CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. You might have exhaust coming in if: D Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris. D Repairs weren’t done correctly. D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been CAUTION: modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust your vehicle: parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park D Drive it only with all the windows down to over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that blow out any CO; and can burn. D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-32 yellowblue

Running Your Engine While You’re Parked (Automatic Transaxle) CAUTION: It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. CAUTION: Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the Idling the engine with the climate control system engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. off could allow dangerous exhaust into You or others could be injured. To be sure your your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly “Engine Exhaust”). level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a garage with the engine running. trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. (See “Blizzard” in the Index.)

2-33 yellowblue

Windows To lower the window, press and hold the rear of the switch. To raise the window, press and hold the Manual Windows switch forward. On a vehicle with manual windows, use the window Express Down Window crank to open and close each window. The driver’s window switch has an auto-down feature. Power Windows (If Equipped) The driver’s window can be opened to the desired amount by pushing the rear of the switch to the first detent. For the auto-down feature, push the rear of the switch all the way down. The window will continue going down until fully opened. To stop the window while it is lowering, briefly press the switch forward, then release. Lockout Switch Four-door models also have a lockout switch. Press the lockout switch to disable the rear passenger’s power window switches. This will prevent rear passengers from opening and closing the windows. The driver can still control all windows with the switch in the lock position. Press the lockout switch again to enable the passenger’s window switches. With power windows, switches on the center console control each of the windows when the ignition is on. In Horn addition, on four-door models, each rear passenger door has a control switch for its own window. You can sound the horn by pressing the center of your steering wheel near the horn symbols. 2-34 yellowblue

Tilt Wheel (If Equipped) Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering The lever on the left side of the steering column wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the includes your: highest level to give your legs more room when you exit D Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator and enter the vehicle. D Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, D Flash-to-Pass then release the lever to lock the wheel in place. D Cruise Control (If Equipped)

2-35 yellowblue

Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you beam to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way to signal a turn or a lane change. toward you. Then release it. To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the high beams are When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. on, this light on the An arrow on the instrument instrument panel will also panel will flash in the be on. direction of the turn or lane change.

Flash-to-Pass This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass. until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward itself when you release it. you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then release the lever to turn them off. As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs. 2-36 yellowblue

Windshield Wipers For steady wiping at low speed, move the wiper stalk up to the (1). For high-speed wiping, move the stalk up to (2). To stop the wipers, move the stalk to OFF. If your vehicle is equipped with variable delay, you can set the wiper speed for a long or short interval between wipes. This can be very useful. Move the stalk to DELAY, then turn the inner band and choose the delay you want. Turn the inner band up for a shorter interval between wiper cycles. Turn the band down for a longer interval between wiper cycles. If your vehicle is equipped with fixed delay, you can use this function by moving the stalk to DELAY. Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper You control the windshield wipers by moving the stalk blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the with the windshield wiper symbol on it up or down. windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your For a single wiper cycle, push the stalk down to MIST, blades do become damaged, get new blades or then release it. The wipers will stop after one cycle. For blade inserts. more cycles, hold the wiper stalk down longer. Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

2-37 yellowblue

Windshield Washer Cruise Control (If Equipped) To wash your windshield, pull the stalk with the wiper symbol on it toward you one time. When you release the stalk, the washers will stop. The wipers continue wiping for approximately three cycles and will either stop or will resume the speed you were using before.

CAUTION:

In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). When you apply your brakes, or the clutch pedal if you have a manual transaxle, the cruise control shuts off.

2-38 yellowblue

Setting Cruise Control CAUTION: CAUTION: D Cruise control can be dangerous where you can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding If you leave your cruise control switch on when roads or in heavy traffic. you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button D Cruise control can be dangerous on and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes could be startled and even lose control. Keep the in tire traction can cause needless wheel cruise control switch off until you want to use it. spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads. 1. Move the cruise control switch to ON. 2. Get up to the speed you want. If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional 3. Push the SET button at the end of the lever and enhanced traction control system begins to limit wheel release it. spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. (See “Enhanced Traction System” in the Index.) When 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.

2-39 yellowblue

Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed There are two ways to reduce your speed while using and then you apply the brake or clutch pedal. This, of cruise control: course, shuts off the cruise control. But you don’t need D Push in the button at the end of the lever until you to reset it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) reach the lower speed you want, then release it. or more, you can briefly move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A. D To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the button. Each time you do this, you’ll go about 1 You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there. mph (1.6 km/h) slower. If you briefly hold the switch at R/A longer, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control apply the brake or clutch pedal. So unless you want to Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When go faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A. you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed: D Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higher speed. Push the SET button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. D Move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch. To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A then release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. 2-40 yellowblue

Using Cruise Control on Hills Exterior Lamps How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. When going up a steep hill, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake or clutch pedal takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills. Ending Cruise Control There are several ways to turn off the cruise control: D step lightly on the brake pedal, or push the clutch pedal, if you have a manual transaxle, or D move the cruise switch to OFF. The band on the turn signal/multifunction lever controls your vehicle’s lamps. Erasing Cruise Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

2-41 yellowblue

Parking Lamps Daytime Running Lamps This position will turn on the following: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for D Parking Lamps others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving D Sidemarker Lamps conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the D Taillamps short periods after dawn and before sunset. D Instrument Panel Lights The DRL system will make your high-beam headlamps come on at reduced brightness in daylight when: Headlamps D the ignition is on with the engine running, This position will turn on the following: D the headlamp switch is OFF, D Headlamps D the parking brake is released and D Parking Lamps D the transaxle is not in PARK (P) on models with an D Sidemarker Lamps automatic transaxle only. D Taillamps This indicator light on your D Instrument Panel Lights instrument panel will come on when the DRL are on. Turn the band rearward to turn the lamps off. Lamps On Reminder If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.

2-42 yellowblue

A flashing DRL telltale indicates a possible burned out Fog Lamps (If Equipped) headlamp, or that the vehicle may need service to repair a stuck DRL relay. When the DRL are on, only your high-beam headlamps will be on at reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either. When you turn on the headlamp switch, your high-beam headlamps will go out, and your headlamps will come on. The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come on. When you turn off the headlamp switch, the regular lamps will go off, and your high-beam headlamps will come on at reduced brightness. To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or parking brake. misty conditions. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular The switch for your fog lamps is next to the instrument headlamp system when you need it. panel intensity control. Push the top of the switch to turn the fog lamps on. Push the bottom of the switch to turn the fog lamps off. When using fog lamps, the parking lamps or low-beam headlamps must be on.

2-43 yellowblue

Fog lamps will go off whenever the high-beam Illuminated Entry headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the fog lamps will come on again. When you open either front door, or open a rear door, the lamps inside your vehicle will go on. These lamps Interior Lamps will fade off after about 40 seconds, or when the ignition is turned on after all the doors have been closed. Instrument Panel Intensity Control If the ignition has been off for less than two minutes, the lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about 15 seconds to provide an illuminated exit when you remove the key from the ignition. After you exit the vehicle and all of the doors have been closed, the lamps will stay on for an additional four seconds before fading off. These lamps will also go on when you press the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).

You can brighten or dim the instrument panel lights by turning the dial up or down. Turn the dial up all the way to turn on the interior courtesy lamps.

2-44 yellowblue

Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped) Battery Saver Your vehicle is equipped with a battery saver feature designed to protect your vehicle’s battery. When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, dome, glove box, etc.) is left on and the ignition is turned off, the battery rundown protection system will automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes. This will avoid draining the battery. This system does not protect against leaving on the headlamps or parking lamps. To reactivate the interior lamps, either: D the ignition must be turned on, D the activated lamp switch must be turned off, then on, or D a front door must be opened. These lamps are located on the rearview mirror. Turn The battery rundown protection feature will also be each one on and off by pressing its switch. activated when any door is left open. Map Lamps (If Equipped) These lamps are located forward of the dome lamp. To turn the lamps on, press the switch. Press the switch again to turn them off.

2-45 yellowblue

Mirrors Power Remote Control Mirrors (If Equipped) Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror To reduce glare from lamps behind you, move the lever The mirror control is toward you to the night position. located on the driver’s door. Rotate the control clockwise Manual Remote Control Mirror or counterclockwise to choose the mirror you want The outside rearview mirror to adjust. should be adjusted so you can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position. Then move the control in the direction you want the mirror to move. Adjust each mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position. The mirror is a spring-loaded breakaway design.

Adjust the driver’s side outside mirror with the control Convex Outside Mirror lever on the driver’s door. Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex To adjust your passenger’s side mirror, sit in the driver’s mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the seat and have a passenger adjust the mirror for you. driver’s seat. The mirror is a spring-loaded breakaway design.

2-46 yellowblue

Convenience Net (If Equipped) CAUTION: Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see it just inside the back wall of the trunk. Put small loads, A convex mirror can make things (like other like grocery bags, behind the net. It can help keep them vehicles) look farther away than they really are. from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you stops. Unclip a corner of the convenience net to fit larger objects behind the net, then re clip it to secure could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your - them in place. inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store them in the trunk as far forward as you can. You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when Storage Compartments you’re not using it. Center Console Storage Area Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter To open the center console, pull the lift lever up and the (If Equipped) lid back. To use the lighter, just push it in all the way and let go. To close the center console, push the lid down until When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself. it clicks. Center Console Cupholders Open the center console lid all the way to uncover the front and rear cupholders. There is also a cupholder at the front of the console.

2-47 yellowblue

Sun Visors NOTICE: To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You can also swing them to the side. Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to Accessory Power Outlet back away from the heating element when it’s (If Equipped) ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and the heating element. The accessory power outlet is located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel. Just remove the plug from the outlet and follow the proper installation To clean the center console ashtray, remove the entire instructions that are included with any electrical ashtray and empty it. equipment you install. To clean the rear ashtray, open it, push down on the These circuits are protected by a fuse and have snuffer, and pull it out. maximum current levels.

NOTICE:

Don’t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire, causing damage.

2-48 yellowblue

Sunroof (If Equipped) Convertible Top (If Equipped) Press and release the rear of The following steps explain the proper operation of your the switch and the glass convertible top. panel will open to the vent position. NOTICE:

D Remove any items from the convertible top storage area before you lower the top. Even small items in the storage area can damage the top or other parts of the system. D Don’t raise or lower the convertible top when the temperature is below 20_F (-7_C). The cold can cause cracks Open the sunshade by hand when using the and other damage to the top as it is being vent position. lowered or raised. Press and release the rear of the switch again to open the D Don’t raise or lower the convertible top glass panel and the sunshade. Press the front of the while the vehicle is moving. The wind could switch to stop the panel in any position. damage the top. Bring the vehicle to a Press and hold the front of the switch to close the glass complete stop before attempting to raise or panel. The sunshade can only be closed by hand. lower the top. Always make sure that the The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if top is securely latched before driving your vehicle has an electrical failure. the vehicle.

2-49 yellowblue

Lowering Your Convertible Top 1. Set the parking brake and shift your automatic transaxle to PARK (P) or your manual transaxle to NEUTRAL (N). 2. Turn the ignition to RUN. 3. Lower the side door windows completely to avoid wear to the weatherstrips. 4. Push the button in the latch handle and turn the handle down to unhook the latch pins from the holes over the windshield.

5. Pull the latch handle rearward away from the windshield and hold it until the convertible top is fully lowered.

2-50 yellowblue

Installing the Boot

6. Rotate the latch handle up to the locked position.

1. From inside the vehicle, pull the tab on the rear seat to fold down the seat. See “Fold-Down Rear Seat” in the Index. 2. Open the trunk and remove both boot side covers. Leave the trunk open.

2-51 yellowblue

3. Install the boot side cover by inserting the tab (A) on 4. Attach the two snaps on the inside flap of the side the underside of the cover into the slot (B) at the top cover to the top of the quarter trim panel. Attach the of the quarter trim panel. Place the rear flap of the front snap (E) first and then the rear snap (F). The boot side cover in the trunk lid opening, aligning the rear snap is adjustable for ease of installation. eyelet (C) over the boot snap ball stud (D).

2-52 yellowblue

5. Pull the boot center cover from behind the rear 6. Go to the rear of the vehicle. Place the boot center seatback and place it over the inner sides of the boot cover along the trunk lid opening. Align one snap on side covers and the lowered top. the corner of the boot to the ball stud and push forward. Repeat for other snap. 7. Close the trunk lid. 8. Raise the rear seatback to the up position. Push the seat back to make sure it is latched.

2-53 yellowblue

Removing the Boot 1. Set the parking brake and shift your automatic transaxle to PARK (P) or your manual transaxle to NEUTRAL (N). 2. Open the trunk and leave it open.

4. Go to the rear of the vehicle. Pull the snap knobs rearward to disengage the rear center cover. Carefully tuck the center boot behind the rear seatback. Make sure that the center cover is not covering the rear seatback latch. Tuck the end of the center boot rearward to keep it away from the rear seatback hinge. 3. From inside the vehicle, fold down the rear seatback. See “Fold-Down Rear Seat” in the Index.

2-54 yellowblue

5. Unsnap both boot side cover snaps (E and F) from 6. Lift the side cover eyelet (C) at the rear of the side the side of the quarter trim panel. boot cover from the snap ball stud (D). Raise the back of the boot side cover to unhook the tab (A) from the slot (B) in the quarter trim panel. Do the same on the other side.

2-55 yellowblue

7. Store both boot side covers in the trunk. 8. Close the trunk. 9. Raise the rear seatback to the up position. Push the seat back to make sure it is latched. Ensure that the rear seatbelts do not become trapped behind the rear seats. Raising the Convertible Top 1. Set the parking brake and shift your automatic transaxle to PARK (P) or your manual transaxle to NEUTRAL (N). 2. Turn the ignition to RUN. 3. Lower the door windows completely to avoid wear to the weatherstrips.

4. Push the button in the latch handle and rotate the handle down. 5. Push the handle forward toward the windshield and hold it until the convertible top is fully raised, and the latch pins are all the way in the holes above the windshield.

2-56 yellowblue

Lowering the Top Manually

NOTICE:

Do not attempt to lower the top manually as damage to the vehicle will occur. If the top fails to raise or lower completely, see “Raising the Top Manually” following.

Raising the Top Manually If your vehicle loses power, or something else happens that prevents you from raising the top electrically, you may need to raise the top manually. This will allow you to safely drive the vehicle until you can get the top repaired. Raising the convertible top manually should 6. Turn the latch handle up to lock the top. Be sure the only be done in an emergency and requires two people. top is securely latched on both sides. Before you do these steps, check to make sure that the bypass switch in the trunk is switched up to the NORMAL OPERATION position. If it is not, switch it to the NORMAL OPERATION position and see if the power top works.

2-57 yellowblue

1. Set the parking brake and shift your automatic 4. Press the bypass switch down to the EMERGENCY transaxle to PARK (P) or your manual transaxle to OVERRIDE position. The switch is located under NEUTRAL (N). Turn the engine off. the shelf panel on the driver’s side in the trunk. 2. Push the button in the latch handle and rotate the 5. Remove the top boot as described in Steps 1 through handle down. 9 in “Removing the Boot” earlier in this section. 3. Open the trunk. 6. Lower the door windows completely. If the power windows do not work, leave the doors open. 7. Position one person on each side of the vehicle. Carefully lift the top by grasping the front corners of the top, not the linkage.

NOTICE:

Do not attempt to force the top up if it does not move freely. The top or its linkage can be damaged. Make sure both sides are being lifted together to avoid twisting. See your dealer if you still can’t move the top easily.

Convertible Bypass Switch

2-58 yellowblue

8. Raise the top until it is all the way up. Line up the 9. Pull down on the top and rotate the latch handle up top so the pins are even with the holes. to lock the convertible top. Be sure the top is latched securely on both sides. 10. Press the bypass switch up to the NORMAL OPERATION position. 11. Close the trunk.

2-59 yellowblue

The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System

2-60 yellowblue

The main components of your instrument panel are: A. Instrument Panel Intensity Control H. Climate Controls and Rear Window Defogger B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever I. Shift Lever C. Hazard Warning Flashers Switch J. Parking Brake Lever D. Ignition Switch K. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever (If Equipped) E. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls L. Hood Release Lever F. Cigarette Lighter/Accessory Power Outlet M. Fuse Panel G. Audio System

2-61 yellowblue

Instrument Panel Clusters Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.

Standard Cluster 2-62 yellowblue

Optional Cluster

2-63 yellowblue

Speedometer and Odometer Tachometer (If Equipped) Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles The tachometer displays the per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your engine speed in revolutions odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, per minute (rpm). in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed. NOTICE: Trip Odometer (If Equipped) The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in been driven since you last reset the trip odometer the red area, or engine damage may occur. to zero. The trip odometer reset button is located next to the odometer. By pressing the reset button, you can alternate between the season odometer and the trip odometer. To reset the trip odometer, press and hold the reset button for one to two seconds.

2-64 yellowblue

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows This part describes the warning lights and gages that there may be a problem, check the section that tells you may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. locate them. Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even Warning lights and gages can signal that something is dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an and gages. They’re a big help. expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or Safety Belt Reminder Light others from injury. When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will Warning lights come on when there may be or is a come on for about eight seconds to remind people to problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is will see in the details on the next few pages, some already buckled. warning lights come on briefly when you start the The safety belt light will engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are also come on and stay on familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed for about 20 seconds, then it when this happens. will flash for about 55 Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem seconds. If the driver’s belt with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and is already buckled, neither warning lights work together to let you know when the chime nor the light will there’s a problem with your vehicle. come on.

2-65 yellowblue

Air Bag Readiness Light Charging System Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument The charging system light panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the will come on briefly when air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light you turn on the ignition, and tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system the engine is not running, as check includes the air bag sensor, the air bag modules, a check to show you it the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. is working. For more information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index. Then it should go out when the engine is started. This light will come on when you start your engine, If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you and it will flash for a few may have a problem with the electrical charging system. seconds. Then the light It could indicate that you have a loose generator drive should go out. This means belt, or another electrical problem. Have it checked right the system is ready. away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery. If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag and air conditioner. system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-66 yellowblue

Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into CAUTION: two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you Your brake system may not be working properly need both parts working well. if the brake system warning light is on. Driving If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem. with the brake system warning light on can lead Have your brake system inspected right away. to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have This light should come on the vehicle towed for service. briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light it fixed so it will be ready to will also come on when you set your parking brake. The warn you if there’s light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release a problem. fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.)

2-67 yellowblue

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light Enhanced Traction System Warning Light (If Equipped) With the anti-lock brake system, this light will come With the Enhanced Traction on when you start your System (ETS), this warning engine and it will stay on light should come on briefly for three seconds. as you start the engine. That’s normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as If the warning light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs If the warning light stays on, or comes on when you’re service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t driving, there may be a problem with your Enhanced on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock Traction System and your vehicle may need service. brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also When this warning light is on, the system will not limit on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section. The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-68 yellowblue

The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come Enhanced Traction System Active Light on for the following reasons: D When your Enhanced If you turn the system off by moving the shift lever Traction System is limiting to FIRST (1) or SECOND (2), the warning light will wheel spin, this light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, come on. move the shift lever back to a position other than FIRST (1) or SECOND (2). The warning light should go off. (See “Enhanced Traction System” in the Index for more information.) D The warning light will come on when you set your Slippery road conditions may exist if the Enhanced parking brake with the engine running, and it will Traction System active light comes on, so adjust your stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If driving accordingly. the transaxle shift lever is in any position other than The light will stay on for a few seconds after the FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and the warning light Enhanced Traction System stops limiting wheel spin. stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means there’s a problem with the system. The Enhanced Traction System active light also comes D on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the If the traction control system is affected by an light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be engine-related problem, the system will turn off and there to tell you when the system is active. the warning light will come on. If the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the transaxle shift lever is in any position other than FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) your vehicle needs service.

2-69 yellowblue

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Low Coolant Warning Light If this light comes on and stays on, your system is low on coolant and the engine may overheat.

See “Engine Coolant” in the Index and have your vehicle serviced as soon as you can. Standard Cluster Optional Cluster Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service Engine Soon Light) Your vehicle is equipped with one of these gages. With the ignition in RUN, this gage shows the engine coolant Your vehicle is equipped temperature. with a computer which monitors operation of the If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine fuel, ignition and emission is too hot! It means that your engine coolant has control systems. overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

2-70 yellowblue

This system is called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to NOTICE: assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner Modifications made to the engine, transaxle, environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the indicate that there is a problem and service is required. replacement of the original tires with other than Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more those of the same Tire Performance Criteria serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls designed to assist your service technician in correctly and may cause the CHECK ENGINE light to diagnosing any malfunction. come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass NOTICE: a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.

If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty.

2-71 yellowblue

This light should come on, as a check to show you it is If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not the Light Is On Steady” following. running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired. If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, This light will also come on during a malfunction in one stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. of two ways: Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, may damage the emission control system on your follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis dealer or qualified service center for service. and service may be required. If the Light Is On Steady D Light On Steady -- An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. You may be able to correct the emission system Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and malfunction by considering the following: service may be required. Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? If the Light Is Flashing If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The The following may prevent more serious damage to diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been your vehicle: left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel D Reducing vehicle speed. cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A D Avoiding hard accelerations. few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. D Avoiding steep uphill grades. Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? D If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

2-72 yellowblue

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition Oil Pressure Light will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. If you have a low engine oil pressure problem, this light Have you recently changed brands of fuel? will stay on after you start If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see your engine, or come on “Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your when you are driving. This engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may indicates that your engine is notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you not receiving enough oil. put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These The engine could be low on oil, or could have some conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately. This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on. The oil light could also come on in three other situations: If you experience one or more of these conditions, D change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one When the ignition is on but the engine is not running, full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. the light will come on as a test to show you it is working, but the light will go out when you turn the If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, ignition to START. If it doesn’t come on with the have your dealer or qualified service center check the ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse or vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and bulb. Have it fixed right away. diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical D problems that may have developed. If you’re idling at a stop sign, the light may blink on and then off. D If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for a moment. This is normal.

2-73 yellowblue

PasslockR Warning Light CAUTION: This light will come on briefly when you turn the Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If key toward START. you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. If the light flashes, the Passlock system has entered a tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see “Passlock” in the Index. NOTICE: If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock Damage to your engine from neglected oil system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock, problems can be costly and is not covered by and you should see your dealer. your warranty. Up-Shift Light (Manual Transaxle) This light comes on when you need to shift to the next higher gear. See “Manual Transaxle” in the Index.

2-74 yellowblue

Check Gages Light When the indicator nears E (empty), you still have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon. This light will come on briefly when you are Here are four things that some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with your fuel gage: starting the engine. D At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads F (full). D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving, little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill check your various gages to see if they are in the the tank. warning zones or if you are low on fuel. D The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or Fuel Gage speed up. When the ignition is on, D The gage doesn’t go back to E (empty) when you your fuel gage tells you turn off the ignition. about how much fuel you For your fuel tank capacity, see “Capacities and have left. Specifications” in the Index.

2-75 yellowblue

✍ NOTES

2-76 yellowblue Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.

3-2 Comfort Controls 3-11 AM-FM Stereo With Cassette Tape Player and 3-4 Air Conditioning (If Equipped) Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) 3-4 Heating 3-16 AM-FM Stereo With Compact Disc Player 3-5 Defogging and Defrosting and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) 3-5 Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped) 3-19 Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped) 3-6 Ventilation System 3-21 Understanding Radio Reception 3-6 Audio Systems 3-22 Tips About Your Audio System 3-7 Setting the Clock for Systems without 3-23 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player Automatic Tone Control 3-24 Care of Your Compact Discs 3-7 Setting the Clock for Systems with Automatic 3-24 Care of Your Compact Disc Player Tone Control 3-24 Fixed Mast Antenna 3-7AM-FM Stereo 3-9AM-FM Stereo With Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped)

3- 3-1 yellowblue

Comfort Controls Fan Knob This section tells you how to make your air system work The left knob selects the force of air you want. Turn the for you. The optional climate control system with air knob clockwise to increase fan speed and conditioning uses ozone-friendly R-134a refrigerant. counterclockwise to decrease fan speed. To turn the fan off, turn the mode knob all the way counterclockwise to With these systems, you can control the ventilation OFF. In any other setting, the fan will run continuously. and heating in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has the flow-through ventilation system described later Temperature Knob in this section. The center knob changes the temperature of the air Standard Climate Control System coming through the system. Turn this knob toward red (clockwise) for warmer air. Turn it toward blue (counterclockwise) for cooler air. Mode Knob The right knob has several settings to control the direction of airflow. For each setting, set the temperature to a comfortable setting. VENT: This setting brings in outside air and directs it through the instrument panel outlets. BI-LEVEL: This setting brings in outside air and directs it two ways. Some air is directed through the instrument panel outlets. Most of the air is directed through the floor ducts and a little to the defrost and side window vents.

3-2 yellowblue

Fan Knob FLOOR: This setting sends most of the air through the ducts near the floor. The rest comes out of The left knob selects the force of air you want. Turn the the defroster and side window vents. knob clockwise to increase fan speed and counterclockwise to decrease fan speed. To turn the fan DEFOG: This setting allows half of the air to go off, turn the mode knob all the way counterclockwise to to the floor ducts and half to the defroster and side OFF. In any other setting, the fan will run continuously. window vents. The fan must be on to run the air conditioning compressor. DEFROST: This setting directs most of the air Temperature Knob through the defroster and side window vents. Some of the air goes to the floor ducts. The center knob changes the temperature of the air coming through the system. Turn this knob toward red Climate Control System with Air (clockwise) for warmer air. Turn it toward blue Conditioning (If Equipped) (counterclockwise) for cooler air. Mode Knob The right knob has several settings to control the direction of airflow. For each setting, set the temperature to a comfortable setting. MAX: This setting recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle and sends it through the instrument panel outlets. The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting when it is needed to help cool the air in the vehicle.

3-3 yellowblue

Air Conditioning (If Equipped) VENT: This setting brings in outside air and directs it through the instrument panel outlets. On very hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot, inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your BI-LEVEL: This setting brings in outside air and vehicle to cool down, which should help fuel economy. directs it two ways. Some air is directed through the For quick cool-down on very hot days, use MAX with instrument panel outlets. Most of the air is directed the temperature knob all the way in the blue area. If this through the floor ducts and a little to the defrost and side setting is used for long periods of time, the air in your window vents. vehicle may become too dry. FLOOR: This setting sends most of the air For normal cooling on hot days, use VENT with the through the ducts near the floor. The rest comes out of temperature knob in the blue area and the A/C button the defroster and side window vents. pushed in. The system will bring in outside air and cool it. DEFOG: This setting allows half of the air to go to the On cool, but sunny days, the sun may warm your upper floor ducts and half to the defroster and side window vents. body, but your lower body may not be warm enough. You can use BI-LEVEL with the temperature knob in DEFROST: This setting directs most of the air the middle and the A/C button pushed in. The system through the defroster and side window vents. Some of the air will bring in outside air and direct slightly warmer air to goes to the floor ducts. The air conditioning compressor will your lower body. You may notice this temperature run automatically in this setting when it is needed to help dry difference more at some times than others. the air in the vehicle. Air Conditioning Compressor Button Press the A/C button to operate the air conditioner compressor. The indicator light above the button will glow when the air conditioning compressor is running. You don’t have to press the button to run the compressor in MAX or DEFROST. 3-4 yellowblue

Heating To defog the side windows while using the air conditioner, set the right control to BI-LEVEL, the fan On cold days, use FLOOR with the temperature knob all control to the highest setting, and press the A/C button. the way in the red area. The system will bring in outside air, heat it and send it to the floor ducts. For both systems, aim the side vents toward the side windows. For increased airflow to the side vents, close Your vehicle has heat ducts that are directed toward the the center vents. rear seat. Keep the area under the front seats clear of obstructions so the heated air can reach the rear Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped) seat passengers. If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater, you can use The rear window defogger it to help your system provide warm air faster when it’s uses a warming grid to cold outside (0_F (-18_C) or lower). An engine coolant remove fog from the heater warms the coolant your engine and heating rear window. system use to provide heat. See “Engine Coolant Press the button to turn the Heater” in the Index. defogger on. It will turn itself off after about Defogging and Defrosting 10 minutes. Your system has two settings for clearing the front and side windows. To defrost the windows quickly, use DEFROST with the temperature knob all the way in the red area. To warm passengers while keeping the If you turn it on again, the defogger will only run for windows clean, use DEFOG. about five minutes before turning off. You can also turn it off by pressing the button again. To defog the side windows, set the right control to BI-LEVEL and the fan control to the highest setting. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license across the defogger grid on the rear window.

3-5 yellowblue

NOTICE:

Don’t use a razor blade or anything else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

Ventilation System For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air Ventilation Tips through your vehicle. Your vehicle also has the D flow-through ventilation system. Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or any other obstruction, such as leaves. The heater and Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies defroster will work far better, reducing the chance of outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside fogging the inside of your windows. air will also enter the vehicle when the air conditioning D fan is running. When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, adjust the mode knob to FLOOR and the fan to the highest speed for a few moments before driving off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows. D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air circulate throughout your vehicle.

3-6 yellowblue

Audio Systems AM-FM Stereo Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco Electronics system can do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it. Setting the Clock for Systems without Automatic Tone Control Press SET. SET will appear on the display for five seconds. Within five seconds, press and hold the right arrow on the SEEK button until the correct minute Playing the Radio appears. Press and hold the left arrow on the SEEK VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and button until the correct hour appears. controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to Setting the Clock for Systems with decrease volume and turn the radio off. Automatic Tone Control RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears. Press pressing the RECALL knob. When the radio is playing, and hold MN until the correct minute appears. press this button to recall the station frequency.

3-7 yellowblue

Finding a Station In addition to the four stations already set, up to three AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM more stations may be preset on each band by pressing and FM. The display shows your selection. two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just: TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations. 1. Tune in the desired station. SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next 2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) higher or lower station and stay there. 3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same SCAN: Press both SEEK arrows; SCAN will appear on the time, within five seconds. Whenever you press the display. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds. same buttons, the station you set will return. The radio will go to a station, stop for a few seconds, then go 4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons. on to the next station. The radio will scan up or down the radio band, depending on the arrow you pressed first. Press Setting the Tone both SEEK arrows or the upper knob to stop scanning. BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increase or PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let decrease bass. you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to TREB: Slide the lever up or down to increase or 14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just: decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may 1. Turn the radio on. want to decrease the treble. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. Adjusting the Speakers 3. Tune in the desired station. BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move 4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle 5. Press one of the four numbered buttons, within five position balances the sound between the speakers. seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button, FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the station you set will return. the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. position balances the sound between the speakers.

3-8 yellowblue

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Finding a Station (If Equipped) AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations. SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there. PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 21 stations (seven AM, seven FM1, and seven FM2 ). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. Playing the Radio 3. Tune in the desired station. VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and 4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to 5. Press one of the four numbered buttons, within five decrease volume and turn the radio off. seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return. RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing the RECALL knob. When the radio is playing, 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. press this button to recall the station frequency.

3-9 yellowblue

In addition to the four stations already set, up to three Adjusting the Speakers more stations may be preset on each band by pressing BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just: the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle 1. Tune in the desired station. position balances the sound between the speakers. 2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move 3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle time, within five seconds. Whenever you press the position balances the sound between the speakers. same buttons, the station you set will return. Playing a Cassette Tape 4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons. Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that P.SCAN: Press both SEEK arrows and P.SCAN will are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes appear on the display. Use P.SCAN to listen to each of longer than that are so thin they may not work well in your preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go this player. to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, If you hear nothing or hear just a garbled sound, it may stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and station. (If a preset station has weak reception, it will start over. not stop.) Press either SEEK arrow or the upper knob to stop scanning. While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL, BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio. Setting the Tone Other controls may have different functions when a tape BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increase or is inserted. The display will show an arrow to show decrease bass. which side of the tape is playing. TREB: Slide the lever up or down to increase or REV: Press the SEEK arrow pointing to the left and decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may the tape will reverse rapidly until you press this button want to decrease the treble. again lightly.

3-10 yellowblue

FWD: Press the SEEK arrow pointing to the right and 3. Insert the adapter. the tape will rapidly advance until you press this button 4. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and again lightly. FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds. The RECALL: Press this knob to hear the other side of a tape symbol on the display will flash, showing that tape that is playing. the cut tape detection feature is no longer active. EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio This override routine will remain active until EJECT will play. If you leave a cassette tape in the player while is pressed. listening to the radio, it may become warm. AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player CLN: If this message appears on the display, the and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset. CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player. Playing the Radio To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps: PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and 1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn 2. Turn the radio on. it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is capable of rotating continuously. 3-11 yellowblue

RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds, played. If you press the button when the ignition is off, and SCAN will appear in the display. Use SCAN to the clock will show for a few seconds. listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to SCV: Your system has a feature called a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The sound audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road will mute while scanning. and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive, 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just: SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, 1. Turn the radio on. to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the 3. Tune in the desired station. way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. 4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that best suits the type of station selected. Finding a Station 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 sound will mute. When it returns, release the button. and FM2. The display shows your selection. Whenever you press that numbered button, the TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to station you set will return and the AUTO TONE choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored equalization that you selected will also be position when you’re not using it. automatically selected for that button. SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. next higher or lower station. The sound will mute while seeking.

3-12 yellowblue

P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your Push these knobs back into their stored positions when favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few you’re not using them. seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with bass and treble equalization settings designed for weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and jazz that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner setting will appear on the display. Press it again after is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number (P1-P6) JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display will go will appear momentarily just before the frequency is blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan through knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs, both FM1 and FM2 preset stations and FM1 or FM2 will control will return to them and the AUTO TONE display appear on the display. will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS and AUTO TONE Setting the Tone button to program AUTO TONE for station presets. BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the Adjusting the Speakers knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s knob clockwise for the right speakers and AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle AUTO TONE display will go blank. position balances the sound between the speakers. TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers to decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the position balances the sound between the speakers. AUTO TONE display will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them. 3-13 yellowblue

Playing a Cassette Tape PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are go to the previous selection on the tape if the current up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer selection has been playing for less than eight seconds. If than that are so thin they may not work well in this the PREV button is pressed and the current selection has player. If a tape is inserted when the ignition is on but been playing for more than eight seconds, it will go to the radio is off, the tape will begin playing. A tape the beginning of the current selection. Your tape must symbol is shown in the center of the graphic display have at least three seconds of silence between each whenever a tape is inserted. When a tape is active, the selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction tape symbol will be accompanied by a direction arrow. arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. The sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation. Press While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE, this button or one of the SEEK arrows again to return to BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you do normal play. for the radio. Other controls may have different functions when a tape is inserted. The display will show PROG (2): Press this button to play the other side of the tape symbol and an arrow to show which side of the the tape. tape is playing. NEXT (3): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to If you hear nothing or hear just a garbled sound, it may go to the next selection on the tape. If you hold the not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and button or press it more than once, the player will start over. continue moving forward through the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each The player is able to detect a tight or broken tape, and selection for NEXT or SEEK to work. The tape will eject the tape. The radio will go back to playing the direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation. last station selected. The sound will mute during NEXT or SEEK operation. The player automatically senses the cassette for metal or Press this button or one of the SEEK arrows again to return to normal play. CrO2 and sets the pre-emphasis. Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected to play first.

3-14 yellowblue

REV (4): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. CLN: If this message appears on the display, the Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play play the last selected station while the tape reverses. tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to D (5): Press this button to reduce background noise. prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of Note that the double-D symbol will appear on the display. Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby show the indicator was reset. and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. CD Adapter Kits FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette another part of the tape. Press the button again to return tape player after activating the bypass feature on your to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected tape player. station while the tape advances. To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps: AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape 1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. is in the player. 2. Turn the radio off. TAPE AUX: Press this button to change to the tape function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an 3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active. seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds, indicating the feature is active. EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the 4. Insert the adapter. It will power up the radio and ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the begin playing. radio off if this button is pressed first. If you leave a This override routine will remain active until EJECT cassette tape in the player while listening to the radio, it is pressed. may become warm.

3-15 yellowblue

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player SCV: Your system has a feature called and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 Playing the Radio and FM2. The display shows your selection. PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is position when you’re not using it. capable of rotating continuously. SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being next higher or lower station. The sound will mute played. If you press the button when the ignition is off, while seeking. the clock will show for a few seconds.

3-16 yellowblue

SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds, stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The sound scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner will mute while scanning. is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number (P1-P6) PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let will appear momentarily just before the frequency is you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan through 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just: both FM1 and FM2 preset stations and FM1 or FM2 will appear on the display. 1. Turn the radio on. Setting the Tone 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the 3. Tune in the desired station. knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to 4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s best suits the type of station selected. AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The AUTO TONE display will go blank. sound will mute. When it returns, release the button. TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the Whenever you press that numbered button, the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise station you set will return and the AUTO TONE to decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s equalization that you selected will also be AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the automatically selected for that button. AUTO TONE display will go blank. If a station is weak 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations 3-17 yellowblue

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when Playing a Compact Disc you’re not using them. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. The bass and treble equalization settings designed for display will show CD and the CD symbol. If you want country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and jazz to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first RECALL or EJECT. press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot, setting will appear on the display. Press it again after the disc may not play and ERR (error) may appear on JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display will go the display. Press RECALL to take ERR off the display. blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB When things get back to normal, the disc should play. If knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs, the disc comes out, it could be that: control will return to them and the AUTO TONE display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS and AUTO TONE D The disc is upside down. button to program AUTO TONE for station presets. D It is dirty, scratched or wet. Adjusting the Speakers D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the try again.) knob clockwise for the right speakers and PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle go to the previous track if the current selection has been position balances the sound between the speakers. playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the is pressed and the current selection has been playing for knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle the current selection. If you hold the button or press it position balances the sound between the speakers. more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them. 3-18 yellowblue

RDM (2): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, CD AUX: Press this button to change to the disc rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will show on function when the radio is on. A CD icon will appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn off random play. the display when the disc is in the player, whether it is RDM is reset to off when the disc is ejected. active or not. NEXT (3): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc. The radio go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it will play. The disc will start at the first track when you more than once, the player will continue moving reinsert it. forward through the disc. The sound will mute If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the while seeking. player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it was within a track. Release it to play the passage. You can stopped. If you press EJECT but don’t remove the disc, use the counter reading on the display to locate a the player will pull the disc back in to protect it after about passage easily. one minute. If you leave a compact disc in the player FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance while listening to the radio, it may become warm. quickly within a track. Release it to resume playing. You Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped) can use the counter reading on the display to locate a R passage easily. THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio RECALL: Press this button to see which track is functions whenever battery power is removed. playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how long it has been playing (elapsed time). The track The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or number also appears when you change the volume or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the when a new track starts to play. radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen. AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc is in the player. The letters CD will go off the display.

3-19 yellowblue

When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display 6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery with your code. power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power 7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret with your code. code before it will operate. 8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature code matches the secret code you have written down. The instructions which follow explain how to enter your The display will show REP to let you know that you secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your recommended that you read through all nine steps secret code. before starting the procedure. 9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to LED indicator by the volume control will begin time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4. flashing when the ignition is turned off. 1. Write down any three or four-digit number from Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from Power Loss the vehicle. Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than 2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. 15 seconds between steps: 3. Turn the radio off. 1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display. 4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down 2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the 3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree secret code number which you have written down. with your code. 5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.

3-20 yellowblue

4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree 6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code. with your code. 5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the 7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is The display will show ---, indicating that the radio is now operable and secure. no longer secured. If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour display. The radio will remain secured until the correct with the ignition on before you can try again. When you code is entered. try again, you will only have three chances to enter the When battery power is removed and later applied to a correct code before INOP appears. secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer. appear on the display. Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than this section. 15 seconds between steps: 1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. Understanding Radio Reception 2. Turn the radio off. AM 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, until SEC shows on the display. especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick 4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try 5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it. with your code.

3-21 yellowblue

FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals NOTICE: will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing Before you add any sound equipment to your the sound to come and go. vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can Tips About Your Audio System add what you want. If you can, it’s very Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable important to do it properly. Added sound until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher equipment may interfere with the operation of volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radio or and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by other systems, and even damage them. Your adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe vehicle’s systems may interfere with the sound level before your hearing adapts to it. operation of sound equipment that has been To help avoid hearing loss or damage: added improperly. D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly. covering mobile radio and telephone units.

3-22 yellowblue

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and following steps. extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player. If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player: Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate 1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without 2. Turn the radio on. resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be 3. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette. cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as 4. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds. The player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a tape symbol on the display will flash, showing that known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape the cut tape detection feature is no longer active. player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player. 5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time. The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action, If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control: the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. 1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789). 2. Turn the radio off.

3-23 yellowblue

3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five Care of Your Compact Discs seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds. Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight 4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette. and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a 5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and recommended cleaning time. clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling detection feature is active again. discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean Care of Your Compact Disc Player the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning cassette is not recommended. Fixed Mast Antenna After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will without being damaged. If the mast should ever become display --- to show the indicator was reset. slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette replace it. tape is in good condition before you have your tape Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still player serviced. tightened to the fender.

3-24 yellowblue Section 4 Your Driving and the Road

Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving.

4-2 Defensive Driving 4-21 Freeway Driving 4-3 Drunken Driving 4-22 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4-6 Control of a Vehicle 4-23 Highway Hypnosis 4-6 Braking 4-24 Hill and Mountain Roads 4-10 Steering 4-25 Winter Driving 4-13 Off-Road Recovery 4-29 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4-13 Passing 4-32 Loading Your Vehicle 4-15 Loss of Control 4-34 Towing a Trailer (Models with 2.4L 4-16 Driving at Night L4 Engine and 4-Speed Automatic Transaxle) 4-18 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4-41 Towing a Trailer (Except Models with 2.4L 4-20 City Driving L4 Engine and 4-Speed Automatic Transaxle)

4- 4-1 yellowblue

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on Defensive Driving the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting The best advice anyone can give about driving is: injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or Drive defensively. pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself. Please start with a very important safety device in your These simple defensive driving techniques could save vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.) your life.

4-2 yellowblue

Drunken Driving The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims might think. Although it depends on each person and every year. situation, here is some general information on Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive the problem. a vehicle: The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone D Judgment who is drinking depends upon four things: D Muscular Coordination D The amount of alcohol consumed D Vision D The drinker’s body weight D Attentiveness. D The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, D The length of time it has taken the drinker to these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking consume the alcohol. and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor According to the American Medical Association, a vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use 180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws.

4-3 yellowblue

Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks. The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent. The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them. But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of consumes food just before or during drinking will have a 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of somewhat lower BAC level. 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a a lower relative percentage of body water than men. level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

4-4 yellowblue

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold CAUTION: showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. judgment can be affected by even a small amount There’s something else about drinking and driving that of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even many people don’t know. Medical research shows that fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking. alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if heart. This means that when anyone who has been you’re with a group, designate a driver who will drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that not drink. person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

4-5 yellowblue

Control of a Vehicle Braking You have three systems that make your vehicle go where Braking action involves perception time and you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and reaction time. the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. at the places where the tires meet the road. That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time. Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied. Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. 4-6 yellowblue

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between advanced electronic braking system that will help hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you prevent a braking skid. do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while better braking and longer brake life. this test is going on, and you may even notice that your If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal. normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the If there’s a problem with the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine anti-lock brake system, this stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But warning light will stay on. you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is See “Anti-Lock Brake used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal System Warning Light” in will be harder to push. the Index.

4-7 yellowblue

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions.

Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet. You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS. You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard. A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels.

4-8 yellowblue

Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need Enhanced Traction System to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in If your vehicle has the optional four-speed automatic front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes transaxle, it also has an Enhanced Traction System if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have slippery road conditions. The system operates only when anti-lock brakes. the transaxle shift lever is in the REVERSE (R), THIRD (3) or OVERDRIVE (B) position and the Using Anti-Lock system senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down happens, the system reduces engine power and may also firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin. slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but this is normal. This light will come on when your Enhanced Traction System is limiting wheel spin. See “Enhanced Traction System Active Light” in the Index.

You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.

4-9 yellowblue

When the transaxle shift When you move the shift lever to FIRST (1) or lever is in any position SECOND (2), the system will turn off. The Enhanced other than FIRST (1) or Traction System warning light will come on and stay on. SECOND (2) and the If the Enhanced Traction System is limiting wheel spin parking brake is fully when you move the shift lever to another position, the released, this warning light system won’t turn off right away. It will wait until will come on to let you there’s no longer a current need to limit wheel spin. know if there’s a problem You can turn the system back on at any time by moving with the system. the shift lever to any position other than FIRST (1) or SECOND (2). The Enhanced Traction System warning See “Enhanced Traction System Warning Light” in the light should go off. Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. Braking in Emergencies The Enhanced Traction System can operate when the With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same transaxle shift lever is in any position other than time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more FIRST (1) or SECOND (2). To limit wheel spin, than even the very best braking. especially in slippery road conditions, you should use the other shift lever positions only when necessary. See Steering “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index. (If your vehicle Power Steering ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, see “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.) If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.

4-10 yellowblue

Steering Tips What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it Driving on Curves to go, and slow down. It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are the news happen on curves. Here’s why: based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a traction of the tires against the road surface makes it curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn wheels are straight ahead. the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then The traction you can get in a curve depends on the accelerate gently into the straightaway. condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control. Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to “Enhanced Traction System” in the Index.

4-11 yellowblue

Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around the problem. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or An emergency like this requires close attention and a right depending on the space available. quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-12 yellowblue

Off-Road Recovery Passing You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the (providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

4-13 yellowblue

D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one start your left lane change signal before moving out thing, following too closely reduces your area of of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough vision, especially if you’re following a larger ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a and move back into the right lane. (Remember that reasonable distance. your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, just passed may seem to be farther away from you start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t than it really is.) get too close. Time your move so you will be D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time increasing speed as the time comes to move into the on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a next vehicle. “running start” that more than makes up for the D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. distance you would lose by dropping back. And if Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, be slowing down or starting to turn. you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity. D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the D following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait can ease a little to the right. your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot.

4-14 yellowblue

Loss of Control If you do not have the Enhanced Traction System, or if the transaxle shift lever is not in the OVERDRIVE (B) Let’s review what driving experts say about what position, then an acceleration skid is also best handled happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger. vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a Skidding second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable want to slow down and adjust your driving to these care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery those conditions. But skids are always possible. surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s vehicle control more limited. three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning the accelerator pedal. clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on If you have the Enhanced Traction System, remember: It the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow helps avoid only the acceleration skid. down when you have any doubt. Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. 4-15 yellowblue

Driving at Night Here are some tips on night driving. D Drive defensively. D Don’t drink and drive. D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you. D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. D In remote areas, watch for animals. D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

4-16 yellowblue

Night Vision Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes driver may require at least twice as much light to see the lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, same thing at night as a 20-year-old. making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. What you do in the daytime can also affect your night Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night of things invisible. blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and You can be temporarily blinded by approaching aren’t even aware of it. headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.

4-17 yellowblue

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking. It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. 4-18 yellowblue

CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.

Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, Driving too fast through large water puddles or even it has little or no contact with the road. going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them. tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.

4-19 yellowblue

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There City Driving just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. Driving Through Deep Standing Water

NOTICE:

If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following One of the biggest problems with city streets is the distance. And be especially careful when you pass amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted traffic signals. by road spray. D Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.)

4-20 yellowblue

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: Freeway Driving D Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”) D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. 4-21 yellowblue

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the The exit speed is usually posted. freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to slower than you actually are. the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as Before Leaving on a Long Trip necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part in the right lane unless you want to pass. of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use can easily drive in. your turn signal. Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your service, have it done before starting out. Of course, “blind” spot. you’ll find experienced and able service experts in Chevrolet dealerships all across North America. They’ll Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you be ready and willing to help if you need it. allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit. The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.

4-22 yellowblue

Here are some things you can check before a trip: Highway Hypnosis D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? all windows clean inside and outside? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever. D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked There is something about an easy stretch of road with the all levels? same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, D the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for than a second, and you could crash and be injured. long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be recommended pressure? aware that it can happen. D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook Then here are some tips: along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system? D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently. D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

4-23 yellowblue

Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transaxle. These parts can work hard on mountain roads. D Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill.

CAUTION:

If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope. driving in flat or rolling terrain.

4-24 yellowblue

Winter Driving CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better. D Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. Here are some tips for winter driving: D As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident. D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in D You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of your trunk. special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

4-25 yellowblue

Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.

4-26 yellowblue

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall. pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews D Allow greater following distance on any can get there. slippery road. Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine or loose snow -- drive with caution. until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an If you have the Enhanced Traction System, keep the otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in transaxle shift lever in the OVERDRIVE (B) position shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around so the system will be able to operate. It will improve clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may road. Even though your vehicle has this system, you’ll remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you conditions. See “Enhanced Traction System” in are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the Index. the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. If you don’t have the Enhanced Traction System, accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.

4-27 yellowblue

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow. D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: D Turn on your hazard flashers. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-28 yellowblue

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves CAUTION: fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while. you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again around the base of your vehicle, especially any and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the around again from time to time to be sure snow fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get doesn’t collect there. out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises Open a window just a little on the side of the every half hour or so until help comes. vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help Recreational Vehicle Towing keep CO out. You can tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for use at your destination. Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for recreational towing. Follow the instructions for towing equipment.

4-29 yellowblue

Towing Your Vehicle from the Front 3-Speed 4. Turn the ignition key to OFF to unlock the steering Automatic Transaxle (With a Dolly) wheel. See ”Ignition Positions” in the Index. 5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing. 6. Release the parking brake. When you are finished towing, make sure you replace the CLS/PCM fuse in the instrument panel fuse block. Towing Your Vehicle From the Front 4-Speed Automatic and 5-Speed Manual Transaxles (Without a Dolly) You may tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground for unlimited miles if you have a four-speed automatic or a five-speed manual transaxle. If your vehicle has a three-speed automatic transaxle, it may not be towed in this manner. To tow a vehicle with a Follow these steps: four-speed automatic or a five-speed manual transaxle, 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. follow these steps: 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Open the fuse panel on the driver’s side of the instrument panel. Remove the fuse labeled CLS/PCM. This will keep your battery from draining while towing. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index. 4-30 yellowblue

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF to unlock the steering wheel. 4. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N). 5. Release the parking brake. When you are finished towing, make sure you replace the CLS/PCM fuse in the instrument panel fuse block.

NOTICE:

Make sure that the towing speed does not exceed 65 mph (110 km/h), or your vehicle could be badly damaged. 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Open the fuse panel on the driver’s side of the instrument panel. Remove the fuse labeled CLS/PCM. This will keep your battery from draining while towing. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.

4-31 yellowblue

Towing Your Vehicle from the Rear Loading Your Vehicle All Transaxles

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the NOTICE: proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you Do not tow your vehicle from the rear. Your important information about the number of people that vehicle could be badly damaged and the repairs can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can would not be covered by your warranty. carry. This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight, and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed options.

4-32 yellowblue

CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

The other label is the Certification label, found on the rear If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases, edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross weight tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fast capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going. vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. Don’t carry more than 132 lbs. (60 kg) in your trunk.

4-33 yellowblue

Towing a Trailer (Models with CAUTION: 2.4L L4 Engine and 4-Speed Automatic Transaxle) Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. D Put things in the trunk or rear area of your CAUTION: vehicle. In a trunk, put them as far forward as you can. Try to spread the weight evenly. If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive If you have fold-down rear seats, you’ll properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. find four anchors on the back wall of your For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes trunk. You can use these anchors to tie may not work well -- or even at all. You and your down lighter loads. They’re not strong passengers could be seriously injured. You may also enough for heavy things, however, so put damage your vehicle; the resulting repairs would not them as far forward as you can in the trunk be covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you or rear area. have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, dealer for advice and information about towing a inside the vehicle so that some of them are trailer with your vehicle. above the tops of the seats. D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equipped with a D When you carry something inside the 2.2L L4 (Code 4) engine. You also cannot tow a trailer if vehicle, secure it whenever you can. your vehicle is equipped with a manual or a three-speed D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you automatic transaxle, or is a convertible model. need to.

4-34 yellowblue

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with a If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer 2.4L L4 engine and 4 speed automatic transaxle and the If you do, here are some important points: proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the D vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you There are many different laws, including speed limit should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure that appears later in this section. But trailering is your rig will be legal, not only where you live but different than just driving your vehicle by itself. also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this Trailering means changes in handling, durability and information can be state or provincial police. fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct D Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch equipment, and it has to be used properly. dealer about sway controls. That’s the reason for this part. In it are many D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. (1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, Many of these are important for your safety and that of axle or other parts could be damaged. your passengers. So please read this section carefully D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you before you pull a trailer. tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the against the drag of the added weight. The engine is heavier loads. required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under D Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer. greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) to the pulling requirements. save wear on your vehicle’s parts. D Do not tow when the ambient temperature is above 100_F (38_C). D Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km) per year. 4-35 yellowblue

Three important considerations have to do with weight: In Canada, write to: D the weight of the trailer, General Motors of Canada Limited D the weight of the trailer tongue Customer Communication Centre 1908 Colonel Sam Drive D and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires. Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Weight of the Trailer Tongue How heavy can a trailer safely be? The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg). But weight to measure because it affects the total or gross even that can be too heavy. weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your special equipment that you have on your vehicle. Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or vehicle’s maximum load capacity. advice, or you can write us at: Chevrolet Motor Division Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 7047 Troy, MI 48007-7047

4-36 yellowblue

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Tire-Loading Information Label at the rear edge of the driver’s door, or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. Hitches It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow: D The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing hitch that does not attach to the bumper. hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your simply by moving some items around in the trailer. vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt and water can, too.

4-37 yellowblue

Safety Chains Driving with a Trailer You should always attach chains between your vehicle Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions handling and braking with the added weight of the about safety chains may be provided by the hitch trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety responsive as your vehicle is by itself. chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. (and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground. lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has Trailer Brakes electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read the brakes are working. This lets you check your and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so electrical connection at the same time. you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes brake systems won’t work well, or at all. are still working. Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

4-38 yellowblue

Passing When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the in advance. passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer Backing Up When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument panel to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, possible, have someone guide you. telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes Making Turns or stop. When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer NOTICE: are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important Making very sharp turns while trailering could to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are cause the trailer to come in contact with the still working. vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.

4-39 yellowblue

Driving On Grades Parking on Hills

NOTICE: CAUTION:

Do not tow on steep continuous grades exceeding You really should not park your vehicle, with a 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than normal trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes engine and transaxle temperatures may result wrong, your rig could start to move. People can and damage your vehicle. Frequent stops are be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer very important to allow the engine and transaxle can be damaged. to cool.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start how to do it: down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into they would get hot and no longer work well. PARK (P) yet. On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating. regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If the indicator 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking is in the red area, turn off the air conditioning (if you brake, and then shift to PARK (P). have this option) to reduce engine load (see “Engine Overheating” in the Index). 5. Release the regular brakes.

4-40 yellowblue

When You Are Ready to Leave After Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing Parking on a Hill Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down severe operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating” while you: in the Index. D Start your engine; Towing A Trailer (Except Models D Shift into a gear; and with 2.4L L4 Engine and 4-Speed D Release the parking brake. Automatic Transaxle) 2. Let up on the brake pedal. Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is: 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. D a convertible model, 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. D equipped with a 2.2L L4 (Code 4) engine or Maintenance When Trailer Towing D equipped with a manual transaxle or a three-speed automatic transaxle. Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review this information before you start your trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

4-41 yellowblue

✍ NOTES

4-42 yellowblue Section 5 Problems on the Road

Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.

5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5-11 Cooling System 5-3 Other Warning Devices 5-18 If a Tire Goes Flat 5-3 Jump Starting 5-19 Changing a Flat Tire 5-8 Towing Your Vehicle 5-29 Compact Spare Tire 5-9 Engine Overheating 5-30 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5- 5-1 yellowblue

Hazard Warning Flashers Move the switch to the right to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in. To turn off the flashers, move the switch to the left. When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won’t work. Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

5-2 yellowblue

Other Warning Devices NOTICE: If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered Jump Starting by your warranty. R If your battery has run down, you may want to use The ACDelco Freedom battery in your vehicle another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your has a built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or vehicle. But please use the following steps below to do jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks it safely. clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint. CAUTION: Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle. Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: D 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt They contain acid that can burn you. battery with a negative ground system. D They contain gas that can explode or ignite. D They contain enough electricity to burn you. NOTICE: If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you. If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.

5-3 yellowblue

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching NOTICE: each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to If you leave your radio on, it could be badly start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by damage the electrical systems. your warranty. To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL (N) before setting the parking brake. CAUTION: 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well An electric fan can start up even when the engine as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, batteries. In addition, it could save your radio. clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

5. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery.

5-4 yellowblue

Before you connect the cables, here are some CAUTION: basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part. Don’t connect Using a match near a battery can cause battery positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll get a short gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, that would damage the battery and maybe other and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if parts, too. you need more light. Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t need to add water to the ACDelco FreedomR battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.

6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or 7. Remove the red plastic cap, and connect the red missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal The vehicles could be damaged, too. of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-5 yellowblue

8. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

9. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to 10. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away the good battery’s from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that negative (-) terminal. move. The electrical connection is just as good Don’t let the other end there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the touch anything until the battery is much less. next step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t go to the dead battery.

It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery. 5-6 yellowblue

CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.

11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service. 13. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part each other or any other metal. B. Good Battery C. Dead Battery

5-7 yellowblue

Towing Your Vehicle NOTICE:

CAUTION: Use the proper towing equipment to avoid damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas To help avoid serious personal injury to you of the vehicle. or others: D Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is With current trends in automotive styles and design, it is being towed. essential that the correct towing equipment is used to D Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds. tow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with D Never tow with damaged parts not wheel-lift or car carrier equipment. fully secured. Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if D Never get under your vehicle after it has you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside been lifted by the tow truck. Assistance” in the Index. D Always secure the vehicle on each side with separate safety chains when towing it. D Use only the correct hooks.

5-8 yellowblue

Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage and a low CAUTION: coolant warning light on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant Temperature Gage” and Steam from an overheated engine can burn you “Low Coolant Warning Light” in the Index. badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

5-9 yellowblue

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, NOTICE: try this for a minute or so: 1. If you have an air conditioner and it’s on, turn it off. If your engine catches fire because you keep 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be speed and open the window as necessary. badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. 3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine for four-speed automatic transaxles or DRIVE (D) for three-speed automatic transaxles. If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can the engine can get a little too hot when you: drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can D Climb a long hill on a hot day. drive normally. D Stop after high-speed driving. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your D Idle for long periods in traffic. vehicle right away. D Tow a trailer. If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.

5-10 yellowblue

Cooling System When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see:

2.4L L4 Engine A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan

2.2L L4 Engine A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap CAUTION: B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

5-11 yellowblue

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down. CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

NOTICE:

The coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If Engine damage from running your engine it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

5-12 yellowblue

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant NOTICE: Surge Tank If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level When adding coolant, it is important that you use R isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of only DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant. clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOLR coolant at the If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, system, premature engine, heater core or including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the before you do it. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for engine coolant will require change sooner -- at more information.) 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If it isn’t, your vehicle needs service.

5-13 yellowblue

CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

5-14 yellowblue

CAUTION: NOTICE:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. So liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper use the recommended coolant. coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t CAUTION: get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol R DEX-COOL coolant. and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-15 yellowblue

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it.

1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise (left) about two or two and one-half turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allow any pressure still left to be vented out the discharge hose.

5-16 yellowblue

3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the mixture, to the FULL COLD mark. engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan. By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.

5-17 yellowblue

5. Then replace the pressure If a Tire Goes Flat cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight. It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a Check the level in the surge tank when the cooling skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a system has cooled down. If the coolant isn’t at the skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the proper level, repeat Steps 1 to 3 and reinstall the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by pressure cap or see your dealer. steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible. If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-18 yellowblue

Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers.

CAUTION:

Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R). change a tire. 3. Turn off the engine. To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move, you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

5-19 yellowblue

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Lift and remove the cover. See “Compact Spare Tire” later in this section for more information about the The equipment you’ll need compact spare. is in the trunk. Turn the center retainer nut on the Turn the wing bolt compact spare cover counterclockwise and counterclockwise to remove it. Then lift off the remove it. adapter and remove the spare tire.

Remove the jack and wheel wrench from the trunk. Your vehicle’s jack and wheel wrench are stored in a foam tray. Remove the band around the jack.

5-20 yellowblue

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1. Using the wheel wrench, remove the plastic nut caps (if equipped).

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel wrench (B).

5-21 yellowblue

2. On some models, a cover plate must be removed to 4. Near each wheel well is a notch in the frame which find the wheel nuts. Carefully use the wedge end of the jack head fits in. The front notch is 9 inches the wheel wrench to pry it off. (23 cm) back from the front wheel well. The rear 3. Then use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel notch is 8 inches (20 cm) forward from the rear nuts. Don’t remove them yet. wheel well. As is shown in the diagram above, if your vehicle has flared side moldings, both front and rear notches are 18 inches (46 cm) from the wheel wells. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire. Put the compact spare tire near you.

5-22 yellowblue

CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly 5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle positioned can damage the vehicle and even clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal ground so there is enough room for the spare injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack tire to fit. lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. 6. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

5-23 yellowblue

8. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.

CAUTION: 7. If you have a wheel cover, use your fingers to carefully pull the wheel cover from the wheel. Then Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to remove the flat tire. which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

5-24 yellowblue

CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident.

9. Place the spare on the wheel-mounting surface. 10. Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand or with the 11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle wheel wrench until the counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. wheel is held against the hub.

5-25 yellowblue

12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a criss-cross CAUTION: sequence, as shown. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb-ft (140 NSm).

5-26 yellowblue

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools NOTICE:

Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to CAUTION: brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper passenger compartment of the vehicle could torque specification. cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare in the proper place. tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover and wheel nut caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

NOTICE:

Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.

5-27 yellowblue

Storing the Spare Tire and Tools

CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you can. See “Compact Spare Tire” in the Index. See the A. Wrench E. Extension storage instructions label to replace your compact spare into your trunk properly. B. Jack F. Wing Bolt (Extension Installed) C. Flat Road Tire G. Cover D. Adapter H. Nut Store the flat tire in the compact spare tire compartment and secure the adapter, extension (aluminum wheel only) and wing bolt. Store the jack and wheel wrench in the foam tray.

5-28 yellowblue

Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again. A. Wrench E. Wing Bolt B. Jack F. Cover C. Spare Tire G. Nut D. Adapter

5-29 yellowblue

If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, NOTICE: Ice or Snow When the compact spare is installed, don’t take In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will your vehicle through an automatic car wash with need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, use caution. and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles. CAUTION: And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can tire and its wheel together. explode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine NOTICE: compartment fire or other damage. When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown them can damage your vehicle and can damage on the speedometer. the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your compact spare.

5-30 yellowblue

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out NOTICE: First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels (or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) or too fast while shifting your transaxle back and SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels forth, you can destroy your transaxle. as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will see “Tire Chains” in the Index. cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

5-31 yellowblue

✍ NOTES

5-32 yellowblue Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.

6-2 Service 6-29 Windshield Washer Fluid 6-3 Fuel 6-31 Brakes 6-5 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6-34 Battery 6-5 Filling Your Tank 6-35 Bulb Replacement 6-7 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6-40 Tires 6-8 Checking Things Under the Hood 6-48 Appearance Care 6-12 Engine Oil 6-49 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 6-17 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 6-51 Care of Safety Belts 6-18 Automatic Transaxle Fluid 6-52 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle (Three-Speed Only) 6-53 Cleaning Your Convertible Top 6-21 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (Four-Speed Only) 6-57 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 6-22 Manual Transaxle Fluid 6-57 Electrical System 6-24 Hydraulic Clutch 6-62 Replacement Bulbs 6-25 Surge Tank Pressure Cap 6-62 Capacities and Specifications 6-25 Thermostat 6-63 Air Conditioning Refrigerants 6-25 Engine Coolant 6-63 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6-29 Power Steering Fluid

6- 6-1 yellowblue

Service Doing Your Own Service Work Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and more about how to service your vehicle than this manual GM-trained and supported service people. can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.

6-2 yellowblue

Fuel CAUTION: Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. It is recommended that the gasoline meet You can be injured and your vehicle could be specifications which have been developed by the damaged if you try to do service work on a American Automobile Manufacturers Association vehicle without knowing enough about it. (AAMA) and endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle D Manufacturers Association for better vehicle Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, performance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting experience, the proper replacement parts the AAMA specification could provide improved and tools before you attempt any vehicle driveability and emission control system performance maintenance task. compared to other gasolines. For more information, D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and write to: American Automobile Manufacturer’s other fasteners. “English” and “metric” Association, 7430 Second Ave, Suite 300, fasteners can be easily confused. If you use Detroit MI 48202. the wrong fasteners, parts can later break Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is or fall off. You could be hurt. less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine. Adding Equipment to the Outside of If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you Your Vehicle hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal, affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid and affect windshield washer performance. Check with of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of you have a problem. your vehicle.

6-3 yellowblue

If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control are now required to contain additives that will help label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel California specifications. If such fuels are not available system, allowing your emission control system to in states adopting California emissions standards, your function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing federal specifications, but emission control system oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that vehicle may fail a smog-check test. (See “Malfunction you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with Indicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to the specifications described earlier. your authorized Chevrolet dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of NOTICE: fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl metal parts in your fuel system and also damage (MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not be covered under your warranty. recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized Chevrolet dealer for service.

6-4 yellowblue

Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to CAUTION: find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns your warranty. violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking country where you’ll be driving. materials away from gasoline. You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The cap is behind a hinged door on the right side of your vehicle. 6-5 yellowblue

CAUTION:

If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from While refueling, hang the tethered cap inside the fuel painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the door by placing the fuel cap strap in the strap hanger. Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index. To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.

6-6 yellowblue

When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right Filling a Portable Fuel Container (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly CAUTION: installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index. Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can NOTICE: be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others: If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right D Dispense gasoline only into type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get approved containers. the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may D Do not fill a container while it is inside a cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or and your fuel tank and emissions system may be on any surface other than the ground. damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the the Index. inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

6-7 yellowblue

Checking Things Under the Hood Hood Release To open the hood, first pull the handle inside the vehicle CAUTION: on the driver’s side under the instrument panel. An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

6-8 yellowblue

Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood marked “prop rod.” Use the prop rod sleeve when handling the hood prop.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the secondary hood release handle. The secondary hood hood and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the hood release lever is located near the front center of the hood 8 to 10 inches (20 to 25 cm) above the vehicle and toward the driver’s side. release so that it will latch fully. Check to make sure the To make sure that the secondary hood release handle hood is closed and repeat if necessary. works properly, lubricate the hood latch at least once a year.

6-9 yellowblue

2.2L L4 Engine (Code 4) When you open the hood, you’ll see:

A. Coolant Surge Tank E. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Reservoir (If Equipped) H. Battery C. Engine Oil Fill Cap/Dipstick F. Automatic Transaxle Fluid I. Windshield Washer Fluid D. Brake Fluid Reservoir Dipstick (If Equipped) Reservoir 6-10 yellowblue

2.4L L4 Engine (Code T) When you open the hood, you’ll see:

A. Coolant Surge Tank E. Brake Fluid Reservoir H. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter B. Engine Oil Fill Cap F. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid I. Windshield Washer Fluid C. Engine Oil Dipstick Reservoir (If Equipped) Reservoir D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir G. Battery 6-11 yellowblue

Engine Oil It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. Check the oil here if you have a 2.2L engine.

Check the oil here if you have a 2.4L engine. The dipstick’s handle will be a yellow ring. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

6-12 yellowblue

Checking Engine Oil Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or NOTICE: cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged.

When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” This is where you add oil if you have a 2.2L engine. in the Index.

6-13 yellowblue

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol.

If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. If This is where you add oil if you have a 2.4L engine. you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in into your engine is American Petroleum Institute the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way certified for gasoline engines. back in when you’re through. You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

6-14 yellowblue

As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s going to be 0_F (-18_C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.

NOTICE:

Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. If you are in an area where the temperature falls below -20_F (-29_C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures.

6-15 yellowblue

Engine Oil Additives If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever advise if you think something should be added. occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed When to Change Engine Oil engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower. If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city maintenance schedule: What to Do with Used Oil D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). Did you know that used engine oil contains certain This is particularly important when outside elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could temperatures are below freezing. even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw driving in stop-and-go traffic). away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See D Most trips are through dusty areas. the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal D The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi of oil products.) or other commercial application. Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, occurs first. recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help.

6-16 yellowblue

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

To check or replace the filter, remove the screws that hold the cover on and lift the cover. Be sure to reinstall The air cleaner is located on the driver’s side of the the air cleaner filter and replace the cover tightly. engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air filter. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

6-17 yellowblue

Automatic Transaxle Fluid CAUTION: (Three-Speed Only)

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter When to Check and Change off can cause you or others to be burned. The air A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if level is when the engine oil is changed. the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or drive with it off, and be careful working on the more of these conditions: engine with the air cleaner/filter off. D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. D In hilly or mountainous terrain. NOTICE: D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you’re driving.

6-18 yellowblue

How to Check Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving: Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the D When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C). dealership service department. D At high speed for quite a while. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the D In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather. instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180_F to 200_F (82_C to 93_C). NOTICE: Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50_F Too much or too little fluid can damage your (10_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), you may have transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the to drive longer. fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid.

6-19 yellowblue

Checking the Fluid Level 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the then pull it back out again. engine running. D 3. Check both sides of the With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever dipstick, and read the in PARK (P). lower level. The fluid D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift level must be in the lever through each gear range, pausing for about cross-hatched area. three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). D Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes. Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

1. If you have a 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the three-speed automatic dipstick back in all the way. transaxle, the handle on the transaxle dipstick is a red ring. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

6-20 yellowblue

How to Add Fluid 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.” Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended 4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. dipstick back in all the way. If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper Automatic Transaxle Fluid fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the dipstick. (Four-Speed Only) 1. Pull out the dipstick. It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership service dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level. department and have it repaired as soon as possible. You It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one may also have your fluid level checked by your dealer pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill. or service center when you have your oil changed. Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or NOTICE: more of these conditions: D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature We recommend you use only fluid labeled regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is D made especially for your automatic transaxle. In hilly or mountainous terrain. Damage caused by fluid other than D When doing frequent trailer towing. DEXRONR III is not covered by your new - D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. vehicle warranty. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

6-21 yellowblue

How to Check NOTICE: Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at your Chevrolet dealership We recommend you use only fluid labeled Service Department. DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the made especially for your automatic transaxle. instructions here, or you could get a false reading Damage caused by fluid other than on the dipstick. DEXRONR-III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. NOTICE: Manual Transaxle Fluid Too much or too little fluid can damage your When to Check manual transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed. However, the fluid in your manual transaxle parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be doesn’t require changing. sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid.

Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on a level place and the manual transaxle is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transaxle case.

6-22 yellowblue

Then, follow these steps:

1. The manual transaxle dipstick is located below the brake master cylinder, near the rear of the transaxle case. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and clean it with a rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way and remove it. 3. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. The fluid level must be between the ADD and FULL marks. (Note: Fluid may appear at the bottom of the dipstick even when the fluid level is several pints low.) 4. If the fluid level is where it should be, push the dipstick back in all the way and flip the handle down. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described in the next steps.

6-23 yellowblue

How to Add Fluid When to Check and What to Use Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 1. Remove the dipstick by flipping the handle up and then pulling the dipstick out. 2. Add fluid at the dipstick hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to the FULL mark on the dipstick. 3. Push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. Hydraulic Clutch The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how filled with hydraulic clutch fluid. often you should check the fluid level in your clutch It isn’t a good idea to “top off” your clutch fluid. Adding master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See fluid won’t correct a leak. “Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

6-24 yellowblue

How to Check Engine Coolant You do not need to check the fluid level unless you The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with suspect a clutch problem. To check the fluid level, take DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed the cap off. If the fluid reaches the step inside the to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles reservoir, the fluid level is correct. (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only R Surge Tank Pressure Cap DEX-COOL extended life coolant. The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with NOTICE: engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. Your surge tank cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to DEX-COOLR coolant will: prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage D _ _ from overheating. Give freezing protection down to -34 F (-37 C). D Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C). When you replace your surge tank pressure cap, a GM D Protect against rust and corrosion. cap is recommended. D Help keep the proper engine temperature. Thermostat D Let the warning lights and gages work as Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat they should. in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature. When you replace your thermostat, an ACDelcoR thermostat is recommended. 6-25 yellowblue

NOTICE: CAUTION:

When adding coolant, it is important that you use R Adding only plain water to your cooling system only DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant. can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper system, premature engine, heater core or coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the warning system is set for the proper coolant engine coolant will require change sooner -- at mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use R get the overheat warning. Your engine could of coolant other than DEX-COOL is not catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use covered by your new vehicle warranty. a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOLR coolant. What to Use Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.

6-26 yellowblue

Checking Coolant NOTICE:

If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system.

NOTICE: The surge tank is located on the passenger’s side of the If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to engine compartment. add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful.

6-27 yellowblue

Adding Coolant CAUTION: If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine is cool. engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure cap -- even a CAUTION: little -- when the engine and radiator are hot. You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your and it will burn if the engine parts are hot engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine. FULL COLD mark.

If the light comes on and When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is stays on, it means you’re hand-tight. low on engine coolant. See “Low Coolant Light” in the Index.

6-28 yellowblue

Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering Fluid When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. The level should be at the C mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark. What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use, see “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. Windshield Washer Fluid When to Check Power Steering Fluid What to Use It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature and repaired. may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.

6-29 yellowblue

Adding Washer Fluid NOTICE: Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. D When using concentrated washer fluid, Add washer fluid until the follow the manufacturer’s instructions for tank is full. adding water. D Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid. D Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full. D Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint.

6-30 yellowblue

Brakes So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid Brake Fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add Your brake master cylinder (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is reservoir is on the driver’s done on the brake hydraulic system. side of the engine compartment. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is Light” in the Index. leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.

6-31 yellowblue

What to Add When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake NOTICE: fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage Maintenance Schedule. brake system parts. For example, just a few Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine around the cap before removing it. This will help keep oil, in your brake system can damage brake dirt from entering the reservoir. system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. CAUTION: D If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid system, your brakes may not work well, or they on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off may not even work at all. This could cause a immediately. See “Appearance Care” in crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. the Index.

6-32 yellowblue

Brake Wear Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. applied. This does not mean something is wrong with Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make your brakes. a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are See “Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection” in worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come Section 7 of this manual under Part C “Periodic and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving Maintenance Inspections.” (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly). Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the CAUTION: proper sequence to GM specifications. Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if The brake wear warning sound means that soon you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear an accident. When you hear the brake wear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. you have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete NOTICE: axle sets. See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.” could result in costly brake repair.

6-33 yellowblue

Brake Pedal Travel system -- for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong Brake Adjustment for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc performance you’ve come to expect can change in many brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly. brake parts. If you drive in that way, then -- very carefully -- make a few moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles (1 Battery 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly. Your new vehicle comes with an ACDelco FreedomR If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your battery. When it’s time for a new battery, we recommend rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by an ACDelco Freedom battery. Get one that has the backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times. replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. Replacing Brake System Parts Vehicle Storage The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from the was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake battery. This will help keep your battery from parts. When you replace parts of your braking running down.

6-34 yellowblue

Bulb Replacement CAUTION: The following procedures tell you how to replace the bulbs for your vehicle. Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas For the type of bulb to use, see “Replacement Bulbs” in that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you the Index. aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index for tips on working around a battery without For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your Chevrolet dealer’s getting hurt. service department. Halogen Bulbs Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent CAUTION: Feature” in the Index. Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.

6-35 yellowblue

Headlamps

2. Remove the other bolt that anchors the headlamp assembly. Pull the headlamp assembly toward the 1. Remove the first bolt. Then remove the remaining front of the vehicle to access the bulb assembly. plastic fasteners holding the shield. Use the end of a flat-head screwdriver to pull up the center of the When replacing the driver’s side headlamp, twist the fastener. Be careful not to break the fasteners that bulb assembly one-eighth of a turn counterclockwise hold the shield in place. and remove it from the headlamp assembly. When replacing the passenger’s side headlamp, twist the bulb assembly one-eighth of a turn clockwise and remove it from the headlamp assembly.

6-36 yellowblue

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (Models Without a Spoiler) To change the bulb, do the following: 1. Open the trunk and view the access hole under the rear shelf. 2. Remove the bulb sockets by turning and pull down. 3. Remove the bulb and replace. 4. Re-install the new bulb and socket into the CHMSL. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (Models With a Spoiler) To change the bulb, do the following: 3. Disconnect the bulb base from the socket by lifting R the plastic locking tab. 1. Use a TORX screwdriver to unscrew the bulb assembly from the spoiler. 4. Snap a new bulb into the socket. 2. Gently pull out the bulb assembly. 5. Replace the bulb assembly by reversing Steps 1 through 3, making sure the lower leg of the 3. Remove the bulb(s) by gently wiggling the bulb headlamp bracket is properly seated into the from the assembly. wedge-shaped retainer. 4. Replace the bulb(s) and reverse these steps to replace the bulb assembly.

6-37 yellowblue

Taillamps and Rear Turn Signal Lamps

3. To remove the bulb, pull it out.

To replace a bulb, do the following: 4. Push in a new bulb. 1. Remove the fastener which holds down the trunk 5. Reverse all steps to replace the taillamp assembly. trim. On vehicles without a convenience net, pry the fastener loose. On vehicles with a convenience net, remove the net and unscrew the fastener. Then pull down the trunk trim. 2. Remove the assembly by turning it one-quarter of a turn counterclockwise.

6-38 yellowblue

Back-Up Lamps Dome Lamp without Integral To replace a back-up lamp, do the following: Reading Lamps 1. Open the trunk lid and locate the back-up lamp To replace a bulb, do the following: assembly on the trunk lid. 1. From the rear of the dome lamp lens, insert a flat 2. Gently remove the bulb from the socket by turning it screwdriver between the roof trim and the lens. counterclockwise and pulling it out. 2. With the screwdriver, push the tab at the rear of the 3. Replace the bulb in the socket by aligning the tabs lens forward to release the lens. and turning clockwise. 3. Pull the lamp lens rearward to release the two front tabs. Dome Lamp with Integral Reading Lamps 4. Gently remove and replace the bulb(s). To replace a bulb, do the following: 5. Reverse these steps to replace the lens. 1. Insert a flat screwdriver into the slot at the rear of the lens. 2. With the screwdriver, push the tab rearward to release the lamp lens. 3. Push the lens forward to release the two tabs at the front of the lens. 4. Gently remove and replace the bulb(s). 5. Reverse these steps to replace the lens.

6-39 yellowblue

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver’s side of the vehicle. Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade 3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2. Check” in Section 7 of this manual under Part B “Owner Checks and Services” for more information. Tires Replacement blades come in different types and are Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by removed in different ways. For the proper type and a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions length, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index. about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see Here’s how to remove the Shepherd’s Hook type: your Chevrolet Warranty booklet for details.

CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. D Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. CAUTION: (Continued)

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield. 6-40 yellowblue

CAUTION: (Continued) NOTICE: D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overloaded tires. The resulting accident overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires could cause serious injury. Check all tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can frequently to maintain the recommended get the following: pressure. Tire pressure should be checked D when your tires are cold. Too much flexing D D Overinflated tires are more likely to be Too much heat D cut, punctured or broken by a sudden Tire overloading D impact -- such as when you hit a pothole. Bad wear D Keep tires at the recommended pressure. Bad handling D D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your Bad fuel economy. tread is badly worn, or if your tires have If your tires have too much air (overinflation), been damaged, replace them. you can get the following: D Unusual wear D Bad handling Inflation -- Tire Pressure D Rough ride The Tire-Loading Information label, which is on the D Needless damage from road hazards. rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

6-41 yellowblue

When to Check Check your tires once a month or more. Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. pattern shown here. Tire Inspection and Rotation Don’t include the compact spare tire in your Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles tire rotation. (10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in Replacement” later in this section for more information. the Index. The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals.

6-42 yellowblue

When It’s Time for New Tires CAUTION: One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which check the treadwear it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose indicators, which will after a time. The wheel could come off and cause appear when your tires have an accident. When you change a wheel, remove only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or any rust or dirt from places where the wheel less of tread remaining. attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. (See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.) You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: D You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. D You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber.

6-43 yellowblue

D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. CAUTION: D The tire has a bump, bulge or split. D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while can’t be repaired well because of the size or location driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types of the damage. (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash. Buying New Tires Using tires of different sizes may also cause To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same the Tire-Loading Information label. size and type tires on all wheels. The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had It’s all right to drive with your compact spare, a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) though. It was developed for use on your vehicle. number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on CAUTION: your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the (for mud and snow). wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after If you ever replace your tires with those not having a many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, tires with the wheels on your vehicle. bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

6-44 yellowblue

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear The following information relates to the system The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on developed by the United States National Highway the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by conditions on a specified government test course. For treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, may depart significantly from the norm due to variations space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with in driving habits, service practices and differences in nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), road characteristics and climate. or to some limited-production tires. Traction -- AA, A, B, C While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, grades, they must also conform to Federal safety B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop requirements and additional General Motors Tire on wet pavement as measured under controlled Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

6-45 yellowblue

Temperature -- A, B, C Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the may need to be rebalanced. material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and Wheel Replacement excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted which all passenger car tires must meet under the or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your by law. dealer if any of these conditions exist. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. established for a tire that is properly inflated and not Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the excessive loading, either separately or in combination, same way as the one it replaces. can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle. carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

6-46 yellowblue

Used Replacement Wheels CAUTION: CAUTION: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or lose control. You could have a collision in which how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly you or others could be injured. Always use the and cause an accident. If you have to replace a correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel. replacement. Tire Chains

NOTICE: NOTICE:

The wrong wheel can also cause problems with If your vehicle has P195/65R15 or P205/55R16 bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or size tires, don’t use tire chains. They can odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper damage your vehicle because there’s not height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire enough clearance. chain clearance to the body and chassis. NOTICE: (Continued)

See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.

6-47 yellowblue

Appearance Care NOTICE: (Continued) Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some Use another type of traction device only if its are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a manufacturer recommends it for use on your match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are vehicle and tire size combination and road dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings instructions. To help avoid damage to your and instructions. And always open your doors or vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the windows when you’re cleaning the inside. device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels. Never use these to clean your vehicle: If you do find traction devices that will fit, install D Gasoline them on the front tires. D Benzene If you have other tires, use tire chains only where D Naphtha legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class D “S” type chains that are the proper size for your Carbon Tetrachloride tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten D Acetone them as tightly as possible with the ends securely D Paint Thinner fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain D manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the Turpentine chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten D Lacquer Thinner them. If the contact continues, slow down until it D Nail Polish Remover stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle. They can all be hazardous -- some more than others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

6-48 yellowblue

Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. D Carefully scrape off any excess stain. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean D Alcohol area often. A soft brush may be used if stains D Laundry Soap are stubborn. D D Bleach If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set. D Reducing Agents Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle on Fabric Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose 1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt. dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth. 2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet 3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior the container label to form thick suds. Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil 4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly. normal spots and stains very well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. 5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) to remove the suds. Here are some cleaning tips: 6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth. D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. 7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry. D Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.

6-49 yellowblue

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Fabric Protection Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), Your vehicle has upholstery that has been treated with egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and Scotchgardt Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It protects blood can be removed as follows: fabrics by repelling oil and water, which are the carriers 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the of most stains. Even with this protection, you still need soiled area with cool water. to clean your upholstery often to keep it looking new. 2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior Further information on cleaning is available by calling cleaner instructions described earlier. 1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167). 3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat Cleaning Vinyl the area with a water/baking soda solution: Use warm water and a clean cloth. 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it more than once. 4. Let dry. D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows: a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. this product. 2. First, clean with cool water and allow to Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel dry completely. Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces 3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner. waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.

6-50 yellowblue

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear surface finish. window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. Care of Safety Belts Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid. Keep belts clean and dry. Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and Wiper Blades CAUTION: If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it wax, sap or other material may be on the blade may severely weaken them. In a crash, they or windshield. might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Clean safety belts only with mild soap and Windshield Cleaner, Bon AmiR Powder (non-scratching lukewarm water. glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse Cleaning Glass Surfaces it with water. Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. (See washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water. “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn.

6-51 yellowblue

Weatherstrips High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle. Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car application may be required. (See “Recommended washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.) instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.” Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle Finish Care The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by of color, gloss retention and durability. hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products Washing Your Vehicle from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Use basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all paint finish. soap residue completely. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. 6-52 yellowblue

Cleaning Your Convertible Top NOTICE: Your convertible top should be cleaned often. If you use an automatic car wash, use one with water jets and Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on hanging cloths. High pressure car washes may cause a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the water to enter your vehicle. finish or leave swirl marks. When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade. Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge. A Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and a brush salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Don’t use droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching agents. damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoid surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric for a necessary, use non abrasive cleaners that are marked - few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mild safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. foam-type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire vehicle, Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather then let the top dry in direct sunlight. and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

6-53 yellowblue

To protect the convertible top: The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted D After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, completely dry before you lower it. chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because D Don’t get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted finish; you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish it could leave streaks. on any wheels other than chrome-plated wheels. D If you decide to go through an automatic car wash, Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash ask the manager if the equipment could damage that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These your top. brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels. Before entering a car wash, set the climate control to Cleaning Tires VENT and the fan control to the highest speed. This will help to prevent water under high pressure from entering To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner. around the convertible top. Cleaning Aluminum Wheels NOTICE: (If Equipped) When applying a tire dressing always take care to Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle. may then be applied. Petroleum-based products may damage the paint finish and tires.

6-54 yellowblue

Sheet Metal Damage At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do replaced to restore corrosion protection. this for you. Finish Damage Chemical Paint Spotting Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and quickly and may develop into a major repair expense. attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped materials available from your dealer or other service discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected the paint surface. in your dealer’s body and paint shop. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Chevrolet will repair, at no charge to the owner, the Underbody Maintenance surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) control can collect on the underbody. If these are not of purchase, whichever occurs first. removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.

6-55 yellowblue

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

PART NUMBER SIZE DESCRIPTION USAGE 994954 23 in. x 25 in. Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated Exterior polishing cloth 1050172 16 oz. (0.473 L) Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil and asphalt 1050173 16 oz. (0.473 L) Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass 1050174 16 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls 1050214 32 oz. (0.946 L) Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops 1050427 23 oz. (0.680 L) Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglast, plastic, 1052918** 8 oz. (0.237 L) Armor Allt Protectant rubber and vinyl Multi-Purpose Interior Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels 1052925 16 oz. (0.473 L) Cleaner and floor mats 1052929 16 oz. (0.473 L) Wheel Cleaner Spray on and rinse with water 1052930 8 oz. (0.237 L) Capture Dry Spot Remover Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric 12345721 2.5 sq. ft. Synthetic Chamois Shines vehicle without scratching 12345725 12 oz. (0.354 L) Silicone Tire Shine Spray on tire shine 12377964* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Finish Enhancer Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants 12377966* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish 12377984* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Surface Cleaner Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks See your General Motors Parts Department for these products. * For exterior use only. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. **Not recommended for use on instrument panels.

6-56 yellowblue

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) D the model designation, D paint information and D a list of all production options and special equipment. Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. Electrical System Add-On Electrical Equipment This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the NOTICE: windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle labels and the certificates of title and registration. unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle Engine Identification and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can code will help you identify your engine, specifications keep other components from working as and replacement parts. they should. Service Parts Identification Label Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to You’ll find this label on your spare tire cover. It’s very add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is: Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. D your VIN,

6-57 yellowblue

Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit Breakers The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Should your The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from headlamps fail to function, have your headlamp system short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers checked right away. and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems. Windshield Wiper Fuse Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If and rating. the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it fixed. If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same Power Windows and Other Power Options amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power lighter -- and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage. windows and other power accessories. When the current Replace it as soon as you can. load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed. There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the instrument panel fuse block and the engine compartment fuse block.

6-58 yellowblue

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Fuse Usage The fuse panel is located at the left end of the instrument TRN-B/L Exterior Lamps, Back-Up Lamps panel. To open, push the tab on the access door to the F/P-INJ Fuel Pump, Fuel Injectors left and pull the door forward. Make sure to insert the RR DFOG Rear Window Defogger tabs when replacing the cover. CLUSTER Instrument Cluster, Anti-Lock Brake System CLS/PCM Instrument Cluster, Powertrain Control Module, Daytime Running Lamps

6-59 yellowblue

Fuse Usage Fuse Usage O2 HTR Rear O2 Sensor Heater CIG Cigarette Lighter WIPER Windshield Wipers, INST LPS Instrument Panel Lights, Windshield Washers Warning Chimes ERLS Automatic Transaxle, Brake PCM/IGN Powertrain Control Module Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI), L HDLP Left Headlamp, Fog Lamp A/C Compressor, Cruise Control, (Z-24 Model Only) Multiport Fuel Injection INT LAMP Alarm Module: Illuminated Entry, AIR BAG Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Warning Chimes, Overhead (SIR) System Lamps, Map/Reading Lamps, PWR ACC Power Door Locks, Convertible Glove Box Lamp, Trunk Lamp, Top (Convertible Model Only) Radio, Power Mirrors, Remote EXT LAMP Exterior Lamps, Instrument Keyless Entry Panel Lights IGN Engine Ignition HVAC Heater and A/C Control, Engine R HDLP Right Headlamp, Fog Lamp Cooling Fan (Z-24 Model Only) RADIO Radio, Remote Keyless Entry HORN Horn, Diagnostic Connector ALARM Alarm Module, Interior Lamps, PWR WDO/SRF Power Windows, Power Sunroof, Warning Chimes Convertible Top Controls CRUISE Cruise Control (Convertible Model Only) STOP HAZ Exterior Lamps, Anti-Lock Brake (Circuit Breaker) System, Cruise Control, DRL Daytime Running Lamps (Relay) Turn Signals

6-60 yellowblue

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

Fuse Usage IGN Ignition Switch Circuits BATT 1 Power ACC/Stoplamp Circuits The engine compartment fuse block is located on the BATT 2 Lighting Circuits driver’s side of the engine compartment. Lift off the ABS Anti Lock Brake System cover to check the fuses. - COOLING FAN Engine Cooling Fan BLO Heater and A/C Blower PCM Powertrain Control Module A/C A/C Compressor ABS/EVO Anti-Lock Brake System

6-61 yellowblue

Replacement Bulbs Engine Crankcase ...... 4.0 quarts (3.8 L) Lamps...... Bulb Number Automatic Transaxle (3-Speed) Back-Up Lamps...... 3057 Pan Removal and Replacement. . . 4.0 quarts (3.8 L) Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps After Complete Overhaul...... 6.9 quarts (6.5 L) Base Model...... 3357 When draining or replacing torque converter, more fluid Z-24 Model...... 3357NA may be needed. Automatic Transaxle Center High-Mount Stoplamp (4-Speed) ...... Not Owner Serviceable With Spoiler...... 912 Manual Transaxle Without Spoiler...... 1141 Complete Drain and Refill...... 2.0 quarts (1.9 L) Halogen Headlamps, High/Low Beam...... 9005/6 Cooling System Tail/Turn Signal Lamps...... 3057 2.2L...... 10.3 quarts (9.7 L) Dome/Reading Lamps (If Equipped) 2.4L...... 10.7 quarts (10.1 L) Base Model...... 912 Refrigerant (R-134a), Up-Level Model...... 168 & 906 Air Conditioning ...... See refrigerant charge label under hood. Capacities and Specifications Fuel Tank ...... 15.0 gallons (56.8 L) The following approximate capacities are given in Tire Pressures, Sizes ...... See Tire-Loading English and metric conversions. Please refer to Information label on driver’s door. “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for Wheel Nut Torque ...... 100 lb-ft (140 N·m) more information. NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.

6-62 yellowblue

2.2L Engine Specifications Normal Maintenance VIN Engine Code...... 4 Replacement Parts Type...... L4 Air Cleaner Filter Horsepower...... 115 @ 5,000 rpm 2.2L...... AC Type A-1172C Firing Order...... 1-3-4-2 2.4L...... AC Type A-1172C _ _ Thermostat Temperature...... 180 F (82 C) Engine Oil Filter 2.2L...... AC Type PF-47 2.4L Engine Specifications 2.4L...... AC Type PF-44 VIN Engine Code...... T Spark Plugs Type...... L4 2.2L...... AC Type 41-928 Horsepower...... 150 @ 5,600 rpm ...... Gap: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) Firing Order...... 1-3-4-2 2.4L...... AC Type 41-942 _ _ Thermostat Temperature...... 180 F (82 C) ...... Gap: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) Windshield Wiper Blade (Shepherd’s Hook Type) Air Conditioning Refrigerants Left Side...... 22 inches (56 cm) Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. Right Side...... 17 inches (43 cm) If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you’re not sure, ask your dealer. See the refrigerant charge label under the hood for information regarding refrigerant capacity.

6-63 yellowblue

Vehicle Dimensions Wheelbase Length All Models...... 104.1 inches (264.4 cm) All Models...... 180.3 inches (458.0 cm) Front Tread Width All Models...... 57.6 inches (146.3 cm) All Models...... 75.4 inches (191.5 cm) Rear Tread Height All Models...... 56.8 inches (144.3 cm) Coupe...... 53.2 inches (135.1 cm) Sedan...... 54.9 inches (139.4 cm) Convertible...... 53.9 inches (136.9 cm)

6-64 yellowblue Section 7 Maintenance Schedule

This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety, dependability and emission control performance.

7-2 Introduction 7-30 Part B: Owner Checks and Services 7-4 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services 7-35 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7-7 Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance 7-37 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7-21 Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance 7-39 Part E: Maintenance Record

7- 7-1 yellowblue

Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your dealer for details.

7-2 yellowblue

How This Section is Organized “Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains what This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts: you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows good condition. what to have done and how often. Some of these “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” services can be complex, so unless you are technically explains important inspections that your dealer’s service qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should department or another qualified service center let your dealer’s service department or another qualified should perform. service center do these jobs. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists some recommended products to help keep your CAUTION: vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done. Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can “Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be work only if you have the required know how - sure to write it down in this part. This will help you and the proper tools and equipment for the job. determine when your next maintenance should be done. If you have any doubt, have a qualified In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance technician do the work. receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs. If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service information. See “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.

7-3 yellowblue

Part A: Scheduled Maintenance The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses Services these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary Using Your Maintenance Schedule repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know These schedules are for vehicles that: exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short D carry passengers and cargo within recommended distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading Your You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or Vehicle” in the Index. you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal other ways. driving limits. Because of all the different ways people use their D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index. vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the Selecting the Right Schedule following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is condition, see your dealer. right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which schedule to follow: This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.

7-4 yellowblue

Scheduled Maintenance

Short Trip/City Definition Short Trip/City Intervals

Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle: Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Chassis Lubrication This is particularly important when outside (or 6 months, whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation. temperatures are below freezing. Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. driving in stop-and-go traffic). Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter D Most trips are through dusty areas. Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection. D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle your vehicle. (With some models, you should never Service (severe conditions only). tow a trailer. See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.) Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory D If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi Drive Belt Inspection. or other commercial application. One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner.

7-5 yellowblue

Scheduled Maintenance

Short Trip/City Intervals Long Trip/Highway Intervals

Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first). occurs first). Tire Rotation. These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection. on the following pages. Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle Service (severe conditions only). Long Trip/Highway Definition Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire Maintenance is true. Do not use this schedule if the Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first). schedule for these conditions. These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance highway conditions causes engine oil to break on the following pages. down slower.

7-6 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles # Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage and the (166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles transaxle shift linkage. (166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown + A good time to check your brakes is during tire at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km). Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule. See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic ++ If you drive in a highly corrosive environment, your Maintenance Inspections” following. brake calipers may require additional inspection and Footnotes service, at every other tire rotation. See “Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance [ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the Inspections” in Part C of this schedule. California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.

7-7 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

3,000 Miles (5 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

6,000 Miles (10 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

9,000 Miles (15 000 km) DATE j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

12,000 Miles (20 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 7-8 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)

18,000 Miles (30 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

21,000 Miles (35 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

7-9 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

24,000 Miles (40 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

27,000 Miles (45 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

30,000 Miles (50 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service.

7-10 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

33,000 Miles (55 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

36,000 Miles (60 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

7-11 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

39,000 Miles (65 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

42,000 Miles (70 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

45,000 Miles (75 000 km) DATE j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)

48,000 Miles (80 000 km) DATE j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE 7-12 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

50,000 Miles (83 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven SERVICED BY: under one or more of these conditions: MILEAGE – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. – In hilly or mountainous terrain. – When doing frequent trailer towing. – Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t require change.

51,000 Miles (85 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

7-13 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

54,000 Miles (90 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

57,000 Miles (95 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

60,000 Miles (100 000 km) DATE j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. j Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service.

7-14 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

63,000 Miles (105 000 km) DATE j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

66,000 Miles (110 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-15 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

69,000 Miles (115 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

72,000 Miles (120 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

75,000 Miles (125 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)

7-16 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

78,000 Miles (130 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

81,000 Miles (135 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

84,000 Miles (140 000 km) DATE j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

7-17 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

87,000 Miles (145 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

90,000 Miles (150 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-18 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

93,000 Miles (155 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

96,000 Miles (160 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

99,000 Miles (165 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

7-19 yellowblue

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

100,000 Miles (166 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Inspect spark plug wires (except 2.4L Code T L4 engine). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. – In hilly or mountainous terrain. – When doing frequent trailer towing. – Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t require change.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, SERVICED BY: whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. MILEAGE Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.

7-20 yellowblue

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles # Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage and the (166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles transaxle shift linkage. (166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown + A good time to check your brakes is during tire at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km). Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule. See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic ++ If you drive in a highly corrosive environment, your Maintenance Inspections” following. brake calipers may require additional inspection and Footnotes service, at every other tire rotation. See “Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance [ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the Inspections” in Part C of this schedule. California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.

7-21 yellowblue

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7,500 Miles (12 500 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

22,500 Miles (37 500 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)

7-22 yellowblue

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

30,000 Miles (50 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.) j Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)

7-23 yellowblue

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

37,500 Miles (62 500 km) DATE j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

45,000 Miles (75 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

50,000 Miles (83 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven SERVICED BY: under one or more of these conditions: MILEAGE – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.

7-24 yellowblue

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

– In hilly or mountainous terrain. – When doing frequent trailer towing. – Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t require change.

52,500 Miles (87 500 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

60,000 Miles (100 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) (Continued)

7-25 yellowblue

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.) j Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. j Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)

67,500 Miles (112 500 km) DATE j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-26 yellowblue

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

75,000 Miles (125 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

82,500 Miles (137 500 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

90,000 Miles (150 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE (Continued)

7-27 yellowblue

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued) j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

97,500 Miles (162 500 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-28 yellowblue

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

100,000 Miles (166 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Inspect spark plug wires (except 2.4L Code T L4 engine). SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. – In hilly or mountainous terrain. – When doing frequent trailer towing. – Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t require change.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, SERVICED BY: whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. MILEAGE Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.

7-29 yellowblue

Part B: Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check R Listed in this part are owner checks and services which Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL should be performed at the intervals specified to help coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in ensure the safety, dependability and emission control the Index for further details. performance of your vehicle. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your Check the windshield washer fluid level in the vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if Part D. necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index for further details. At Each Fuel Fill At Least Once a Month It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. Tire Inflation Check Engine Oil Level Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See “Tires” in the Index for further details. Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for Cassette Deck Service further details. Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index for further details.

7-30 yellowblue

At Least Twice a Year Manual Transaxle Check Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See Restraint System Check “Manual Transaxle Fluid” in the Index. Check for leaks. Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Have the system belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are inspected and repaired if needed. working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might Automatic Transaxle Check (Three-Speed Only) keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. “Automatic Transaxle Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system if needed. does not need regular maintenance.) Automatic Transaxle Inspection (Four-Speed Only) Wiper Blade Check It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or Check for leaks. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades, your Chevrolet dealership Service Department and have Cleaning” in the Index. it repaired as soon as possible. Weatherstrip Lubrication Hydraulic Clutch System Check Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply “Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss in silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, this system could indicate a problem. Have the system damp weather more frequent application may be inspected and repaired at once. required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.) 7-31 yellowblue

At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant CAUTION: specified in Part D. When you are doing this check, the vehicle could Body Lubrication Service move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be Lubricate all hood latch assemblies, secondary latch, pivots, injured. Follow the steps below. spring anchor, release pawl, hood and body door hinges, rear compartment and any folding seat hardware. Part D tells you 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room what to use. More frequent lubrication may be required when around the vehicle. exposed to a corrosive environment. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake. NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service. On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine. The starter should work only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service. 7-32 yellowblue

Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check Ignition Transaxle Lock Check (Automatic Transaxle) While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position. CAUTION: D With an automatic transaxle, the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P). When you are doing this check, the vehicle could D With a manual transaxle, the key should turn move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be to LOCK only when you press the key release injured. Follow the steps below. the button. On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right. It room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a should only lock when turned to the right. level surface. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary). NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service.

7-33 yellowblue

Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing Mechanism Check downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. D To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With CAUTION: the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake When you are doing this check, your vehicle pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking could begin to move. You or others could be brake only. injured and property could be damaged. Make D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular release all brakes. brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.

7-34 yellowblue

Part C: Periodic Maintenance Exhaust System Inspection Inspections Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, Listed in this part are inspections and services which missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams, should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let service department or other qualified service center do exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are the Index. completed at once. Proper procedures to perform these services may be Engine Cooling System Inspection found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are Publications” in the Index. cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help Boot and Seal Inspection ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system and pressure cap is recommended at least once system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of a year. wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary.

7-35 yellowblue

Throttle System Inspection pad abutments should be lubricated at every other tire rotation. Also, see your GM dealer’s service department Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, or qualified service center for additional information. and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables. Brake System Inspection X–02–0078–V Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking. Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection If you operate your vehicle in a highly corrosive environment, as indicated by the shaded areas on the map following this text, your vehicle may require additional brake service. Refer to the appropriate GM Service Bulletin for the proper caliper inspection procedure. As necessary, caliper pins and knuckle brake

7-36 yellowblue

Part D: Recommended Fluids USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT and Lubricants Windshield GM OptikleenR Washer Solvent NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515) part number or specification may be obtained from or equivalent. your dealer. Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT System No. 12345347 or equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid). Engine Oil Engine Oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Gasoline Engines “Starburst” System Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint, symbol of the proper viscosity. To 1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent). determine the preferred viscosity Manual Synchromesh Transmission Fluid for your vehicle’s engine, see Transaxle (GM Part No. 12345349 “Engine Oil” in the Index. or equivalent). Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Automatic DEXRONR-III Automatic water and use only GM Transaxle Transmission Fluid. GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR or R R Key Lock Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Havoline DEX-COOL R Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in Cylinders Superlube (GM Part the Index. No. 12346241 or equivalent). R Manual Chassis Lubricant (GM Part Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid Transaxle Shift No. 12377985 or equivalent) or System (GM Part No. 12377967 or Linkage lubricant meeting requirements of equivalent DOT 3 Brake Fluid). - NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB.

7-37 yellowblue

USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Clutch Linkage Engine Oil. Hood and Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Pivot Points Hinges SuperlubeR (GM Part Chassis Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent). Lubrication No. 12377985 or equivalent) or Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM lubricant meeting requirements of Conditioning Part No. 12345579 or equivalent). NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Hood Latch LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol Assembly, (GM Part No. 12346293 or Secondary Latch, equivalent) or lubricant meeting Pivots, Spring requirements of NLGI # 2, Anchor and Category LB or GC-LB. Release Pawl

7-38 yellowblue

Part E: Maintenance Record Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on After the scheduled services are performed, record the the following record pages. Also, you should retain all date, odometer reading and who performed the service maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval. is a convenient place to store them. Maintenance Record

ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-39 yellowblue

Maintenance Record

ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-40 yellowblue Section 8 Customer Assistance Information

Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects.

8-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8-9 Warranty Information 8-4 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone 8-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United (TTY) Users States Government 8-4 Customer Assistance Offices 8-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the 8-5 GM Mobility Program for Persons Canadian Government with Disabilities 8-11 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 8-6 Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program 8-11 Ordering Service and Owner Publications 8-7 Canadian Roadside Assistance in Canada 8-8 Courtesy Transportation

8- 8-1 yellowblue

Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager.

8-2 yellowblue

STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That resolved by the dealership without further help, contact is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by a concern. calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling are committed to making sure you are completely 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order continue to remain unsatisfied after following the to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you must file following information available to give the Customer with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any Assistance Representative: additional rights you may have. Canadian owners D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate Information booklet for information on the Canadian at the top left of the instrument panel and visible Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). through the windshield.) D Dealership name and location D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

8-3 yellowblue

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program Customer Assistance for Text administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the Telephone (TTY) Users interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer the program is free of charge and your case will generally Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) with any other venue for relief available to you. Customer Assistance Offices You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address: Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write BBB Auto Line to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. Customer Assistance Center. 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 United States Arlington, VA 22203-1804 Chevrolet Motor Division Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center This program is available in all 50 states and the District P.O. Box 7047 of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, Troy, MI 48007-7047 mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue 1-800-222-1020 its participation in this program. 1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USAR

8-4 yellowblue

Canada If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean, General Motors of Canada Limited call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315. Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive GM Mobility Program for Persons Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 with Disabilities

1-800-263-3777 (English) This program, available to 1-800-263-7854 (French) qualified applicants, can 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) reimburse you up to $1,000 Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive All Overseas Locations equipment you may require GMODC - Customer Communication Centre for your vehicle (hand 169-007 controls, wheelchair/scooter 1908 Colonel Sam Drive lifts, etc.). Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 905-644-4112 This program can also provide you with free resource Fax: 905-644-4866 information, such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers. The program is available Caribbean Numbers for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call 1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935. 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico - - - 1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call 1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users 1-800-389-0009 Bahamas call 1-800-263-3830. When calling from the United 1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I. States, please dial 1-905-644-3063. 8-5 yellowblue

Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program problems. If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a nationwide network of dealer recommended service providers. Roadside membership is free; however some services may incur costs. Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer, Basic Care and Courtesy Care: D Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA D Free towing for warranty repairs D Basic over-the-phone technical advice D Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e., wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glass repair, etc.) ROADSIDE Courtesy Care PROVIDES: D Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously) Plus: To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer D FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the from a legal roadway) establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance D FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost Center. As the owner of a 1999 Chevrolet, membership on the road or locked inside) in Roadside Assistance is free. D FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road) Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day, D 365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road) (1-800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide you D FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor mechanical the road) 8-6 yellowblue

Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers For prompt assistance when calling, please have the needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will following available to give to the advisor: be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by D Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty to eligible purchasers of 1999 Chevrolet passenger cars D License plate number and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer D Vehicle color for details.) D Vehicle location Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease customers operating 1999 and newer Chevrolet vehicles D Telephone number where you can be reached for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), D Vehicle mileage whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must D be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer Description of problem service management. Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or inside your owner information portfolio for full included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle program details. Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care Canadian Roadside Assistance at any time. Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure. in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. will provide you with quality and priority service. When roadside services are required, our advisors will explain any payment obligations that may be incurred for utilizing outside services.

8-7 yellowblue

Courtesy Transportation If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in work day as possible to allow for same day repair. its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating Transportation Options dealerships are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for new vehicles. Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail minimize your inconvenience by providing several purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New your dealer can offer you one of the following: Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are Shuttle Service required. This will reduce your inconvenience during Participating dealerships can provide you with shuttle service warranty repairs. to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of Plan Ahead When Possible your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership. When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should contact your dealer and request an appointment. Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement By scheduling a service appointment and advising your If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, service consultant of your transportation needs, your reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum) dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If it is may be available for the use of public transportation determined that your vehicle cannot be scheduled into such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange the service department immediately and is still transportation through a friend or relative, operative, you are encouraged to drive the vehicle until reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to scheduling can be accomplished. $10 per day (five day maximum) may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. 8-8 yellowblue

Courtesy Rental Vehicle Courtesy Transportation is available only at When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight participating dealerships and all program options, such warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a Please contact your dealer for specific information about rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel. requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General requirements. Requirements vary and may include Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit alternative transportation may be available under the card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, dealer for details. excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, completion of the repair. change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the courtesy rental. terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion. Additional Program Information General Motors and participating dealerships reserve the right to deny a rental vehicle to anyone not possessing a Courtesy Transportation is available during the valid motor vehicle operators license in their name, Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, anyone who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. anyone whose mental or physical abilities are impaired so A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner as to be unable to operate a motor vehicle safely. Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information. Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information. 8-9 yellowblue

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO TO THE UNITED STATES THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could has a safety defect, you should immediately notify cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to Transport Canada notifying General Motors. 330 Sparks Street If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an Tower C investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or General Motors. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline.

8-10 yellowblue

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Ordering Service and Owner TO GENERAL MOTORS Publications in Canada In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify literature are available for purchase for all current and us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write: past model General Motors vehicles. Chevrolet Motor Division The toll-free telephone number for ordering information Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center in Canada is 1-800-668-5539. P.O. Box 7047 Troy, MI 48007-7047 In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

8-11 yellowblue 1999 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION

The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order, or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)

CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1999 CHEVROLET SERVICE MANUALS OWNER’S INFORMATION Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information Owner publications are written directly for Owners and on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, intended to provide basic operational information about the electrical, steering, body, etc. vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00 Schedule for all models. TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and UNIT REPAIR MANUAL Warranty Booklet. This manual provides information on unit repair service RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00 procedures, adjustments and specifications for the Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. 1999 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $10.00 RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00 CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS SERVICE BULLETINS Service Publications are available for current and past Service Bulletins give technical service information needed model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name of the vehicle. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO: Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time S S Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover) 8-12 yellowblue

ORDER TOLL FREE Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal (NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only) service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call 1-800-551-4123 1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return (Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST) information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927 against the original order. VEHICLE MODEL PUBLICATION FORM ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY. PRICE TOTAL 1 NUMBER NAME YEAR EACH* PRICE Service Manual 1999 $90.00 9 Car & Light Truck 1999 $50.00 9 Transmission Unit Repair 1999 $15.00 9 Owner’s Manual In Portfolio Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio 1999 $10.00 G M

TOTAL MATERIAL NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the Check or Money name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent. Order payable to Michigan Purchasers Mail completed order form to: P Helm, Inc. (USA funds add 6% sales tax S HELM, INCORPORATED S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207 only — do not send cash.) For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation. A U.S. Order Processing $5.00 H MasterCard Canadian Postage (See Note Below) Y VISA I GRAND TOTAL (CUSTOMER’S NAME) (ATTENTION) P M Discover E Account (STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS) Number: T Check here if your billing address N Expiration is different from your shipping O (CITY)(STATE) (ZIP CODE) T Date mo/yr: address shown. DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO. ( ) AREA CODE CUSTOMER SIGNATURE GM-CHE-ORD99 *(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.) are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus the U.S. order processing. 8-13 yellowblue

✍ NOTES

8-14 yellowblue Section 9 Index

Accessory Power Outlet...... 2-48 Ashtrays...... 2-47 Adapter Kit, CD...... 3-11, 3-15 Audio Equipment, Adding...... 3-22 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle...... 6-3 Audio Systems...... 3-7 Air Bag...... 1-23 Auto-Down Window...... 2-34 How Does it Restrain...... 1-27 Automatic Overdrive...... 2-24 How it Works...... 1-25 Automatic Transaxle Location...... 1-25 Check...... 7-31 Readiness Light...... 1-24, 2-66 Fluid...... 6-18, 6-21 Servicing...... 1-29 Gear Positions...... 2-20 What Makes it Inflate...... 1-27 Operation...... 2-20 What Will You See After it Inflates...... 1-27 Park Mechanism Check...... 7-34 When Should it Inflate...... 1-26 Shifting...... 2-20 Air Conditioning...... 3-4 Starting Your Engine...... 2-16 Air Conditioning Refrigerants...... 6-63 Alignment and Balance, Tire...... 6-46 Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning...... 6-54 Back-Up Lamps Bulb Replacement...... 6-39, 6-62 Antenna, Fixed...... 3-24 Battery...... 6-34 Antifreeze...... 6-25 Charging System Light...... 2-66 Anti-Lock Jump Starting...... 5-3 Brake System Warning Light...... 2-68, 4-7 Replacement, Remote Keyless Entry...... 2-9 Brakes...... 4-7 Saver...... 2-45 Anti-Theft, Radio...... 3-19 Warnings...... 5-3, 5-5 Appearance Care...... 6-48 BBB Auto Line...... 8-4 Appearance Care Materials...... 6-56 Better Business Bureau Mediation...... 8-4 Arbitration Program...... 8-4 Blizzard, Driving In...... 4-28

9- 9-1 yellowblue

Brake CD Adapter Kit...... 3-11, 3-15 Adjustment...... 6-34 CD Care...... 3-24 Fluid...... 6-31 CD Player...... 3-16 Master Cylinder...... 6-31 Theft-Deterrent Feature...... 3-19 Parking...... 2-28 Center Console Storage Area...... 2-47 Pedal Travel...... 6-34 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement. . . . 6-37 Replacing System Parts...... 6-34 Center Passenger Position...... 1-36 System Warning Light...... 2-67 Certification Label...... 4-32 Trailer...... 4-38 Chains, Safety...... 4-38 Transaxle Shift Interlock Check...... 7-33 Chains, Tire...... 6-47 Wear...... 6-33 Changing a Flat Tire...... 5-19 Brakes, Anti-Lock...... 4-7 Check Engine Light...... 2-70 Braking...... 4-6 Check Gages Light...... 2-75 Braking in Emergencies...... 4-10 Checking Your Restraint Systems...... 1-55 Break-In, New Vehicle...... 2-13 Chemical Paint Spotting...... 6-55 BTSI Check...... 7-33 Child Restraints...... 1-40 Bulb Replacement...... 6-35 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position...... 1-46 Back-Up Lamps...... 6-39 Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position...... 1-48 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp...... 6-37 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position...... 1-50 Dome Lamp...... 6-39 Top Strap...... 1-45 Headlamps...... 6-36 Where to Put...... 1-44 Rear Turn Signal...... 6-38 Cigarette Lighter...... 2-47 Taillamp...... 6-38 Circuit Breakers and Fuses...... 6-58 Bypass Switch, Convertible Top...... 2-57 Cleaner, Air...... 6-17 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels...... 6-54 Canadian Roadside Assistance...... 8-7 Convertible Top...... 6-53 Capacities and Specifications...... 6-62 Exterior Lamps/Lenses...... 6-52 Carbon Monoxide...... 2-10, 2-32, 2-33, 4-29, 4-37 Fabric/Carpet...... 6-49 Cassette Deck Service...... 7-30 Glass...... 6-51 Cassette Tape Player...... 3-9, 3-11 Inside of Your Vehicle...... 6-49 Care...... 3-23 Instrument Panel...... 6-50

9-2 yellowblue

Interior Plastic Components...... 6-51 Convex Outside Mirror...... 2-46 Outside of Your Vehicle...... 6-52 Coolant...... 6-25 Special Problems...... 6-50 Heater, Engine...... 2-18 Stains...... 6-50 Surge Tank...... 5-11 Tires...... 6-54 Surge Tank Pressure Cap...... 6-25 Vinyl...... 6-50 Cooling System...... 5-11 Wheels...... 6-54 Courtesy Transportation...... 8-8 Windshield and Wiper Blades...... 6-51 Cruise Control...... 2-38 Climate Control System, Standard...... 3-2 Cupholders...... 2-47 Climate Control System with Air Conditioning...... 3-3 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users...... 8-4 Clock, Setting the...... 3-7 Customer Assistance Information...... 8-1 Clutch Fluid, Hydraulic...... 6-24 Customer Satisfaction Procedure...... 8-2 Clutch, Hydraulic...... 6-24 Comfort Controls...... 3-2 Compact Disc Adapter Kit...... 3-11, 3-15 Care...... 3-24 Damage, Finish...... 6-55 Player...... 3-16 Damage, Sheet Metal...... 6-55 Theft-Deterrent Feature...... 3-19 Daytime Running Lamps...... 2-42 Compact Spare Tire...... 5-29 Dead Battery...... 5-3 Control of a Vehicle...... 4-6 Defects, Reporting Safety...... 8-10 Convenience Net...... 2-47 Defensive Driving...... 4-2 Convertible Top Defogger, Rear Window...... 3-5 Bypass Switch...... 2-57 Defogging...... 3-5 Cleaning...... 6-53 Defrosting...... 3-5 Installing the Boot...... 2-51 Dimensions, Vehicle...... 6-64 Lowering...... 2-50 Dolby B Noise Reduction...... 3-15 Lowering Manually...... 2-57 Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement...... 6-39 Operation...... 2-49 Door Locks...... 2-4 Raising...... 2-56 Drive, Automatic Transaxle...... 2-23 Raising Manually...... 2-57 Driver Position...... 1-14 Removing the Boot...... 2-54

9-3 yellowblue

Driving Oil Level Check...... 7-30 City...... 4-20 Overheating...... 5-9 Defensive...... 4-2 Running While Parked...... 2-33 Drunken...... 4-3 Specifications...... 6-63 Freeway...... 4-21 Starting Your...... 2-16, 2-17 In a Blizzard...... 4-28 Engine Oil...... 6-12 In Foreign Countries...... 6-5 Adding...... 6-13 In the Rain...... 4-18 Additives...... 6-16 Night...... 4-16 Checking...... 6-13 On Curves...... 4-11 Used...... 6-16 On Grades While Towing a Trailer...... 4-40 What To Use...... 6-14 On Hill and Mountain Roads...... 4-24 When to Change...... 6-16 On Snow and Ice...... 4-26 Enhanced Traction System...... 4-9 Through Water...... 4-20 Active Light...... 2-69, 4-9 Wet Roads...... 4-18 Operation...... 4-9 Winter...... 4-25 Warning Light...... 2-68, 4-10 With a Trailer...... 4-38 Ethanol...... 6-4 Drunken Driving...... 4-3 ETS...... 4-9 Active Light...... 2-69, 4-9 Warning Light...... 2-68, 4-10 Easy Entry Seat...... 1-6 Exhaust, Engine...... 2-10, 2-32, 4-29, 4-37 Electrical Equipment, Adding...... 2-18, 3-22, 6-57 Exterior Lamps...... 2-41 Electrical System...... 6-57 Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Cleaning...... 6-52 Engine...... 6-10, 6-11 Air Cleaner/Filter...... 6-17 Coolant...... 6-25 Fabric Cleaning...... 6-49 Coolant Heater...... 2-18 Fabric Protection...... 6-50 Coolant Level Check...... 7-30 Fifth Gear, Manual Transaxle...... 2-26 Coolant Temperature Gage...... 2-70 Filling a Portable Fuel Container...... 6-7 Exhaust...... 2-10, 2-32, 4-29, 4-37 Filling Your Tank...... 6-5 Fuse Block...... 6-61 Filter, Air...... 6-17, 6-63 Identification...... 6-57 Finish Care...... 6-52

9-4 yellowblue

Finish Damage...... 6-55 Halogen Bulbs...... 6-35 First Gear, Automatic Transaxle...... 2-23, 2-24 Hazard Warning Flashers...... 5-2 First Gear, Manual Transaxle...... 2-26 Head Restraints...... 1-5 Flashers, Hazard Warning...... 5-2 Headlamps...... 2-42 Flash-To-Pass...... 2-36 Bulb Replacement...... 6-35 Flat Tire, Changing...... 5-19 High/Low Beam Changer...... 2-36 Fluids and Lubricants...... 7-37 On Reminder...... 2-42 Fog Lamps...... 2-43 Wiring...... 6-58 Foreign Countries, Fuel...... 6-5 Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance...... 8-4 Fourth Gear, Manual Transaxle...... 2-26 Heating...... 3-5 French Language Manual...... ii High-Beam Headlamps...... 2-36 Front Reading Lamps...... 2-45 Highway Hypnosis...... 4-23 Fuel...... 6-3 Hill and Mountain Roads...... 4-24 Filling a Portable Container...... 6-7 Hitches, Trailer...... 4-37 Filling Your Tank...... 6-5 Hood Gage...... 2-75 Checking Things Under...... 6-8 In Foreign Countries...... 6-5 Prop...... 6-9 Fuses and Circuit Breakers...... 6-58 Release...... 6-8 Horn...... 2-34 Gages Hydraulic Clutch...... 6-24 Engine Coolant Temperature...... 2-70 Fluid...... 6-24 Fuel...... 2-75 System Check...... 7-31 Speedometer...... 2-64 Hydroplaning...... 4-19 Tachometer...... 2-64 GAWR...... 4-33 Gear Positions, Automatic Transaxle...... 2-20 Gear Positions, Manual Transaxle...... 2-25 Ignition Positions...... 2-13 Gross Axle Weight Rating...... 4-33 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check...... 7-33 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating...... 4-33 Illuminated Entry...... 2-44 Guide en Français...... ii Inflation, Tire...... 6-41 GVWR...... 4-33 Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror...... 2-46

9-5 yellowblue

Inspections Labels Brake System...... 7-36 Certification...... 4-33 Caliper/Knuckle...... 7-36 Service Parts Identification...... 6-57 Engine Cooling System...... 7-35 Tire-Loading Information...... 4-32 Exhaust System...... 7-35 Vehicle Identification Number...... 6-57 Front Drive Axle Boot...... 7-35 Lamps Front Drive Axle Seal...... 7-35 Exterior...... 2-41 Steering...... 7-35 Fog...... 2-43 Suspension...... 7-35 Front Reading...... 2-45 Throttle System...... 7-36 Interior...... 2-44 Installing the Boot...... 2-51 Map...... 2-45 Instrument Panel...... 2-60 On Reminder...... 2-42 Cleaning...... 6-50 Latches, Seatback...... 1-5 Cluster...... 2-62, 2-63 Leaving Your Vehicle...... 2-6 Fuse Block...... 6-59 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running...... 2-30 Intensity Control...... 2-44 Lighter...... 2-47 Intensity Control...... 2-44 Lights Interior Lamps...... 2-44 Air Bag Readiness...... 1-24, 2-66 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning...... 2-68, 4-7 Brake System Warning...... 2-67 Jack, Tire...... 5-20 Charging System...... 2-66 Jump Starting...... 5-3 Check Engine...... 2-70 Check Gages...... 2-75 Key Lock Cylinders Service...... 7-32 Enhanced Traction System Active...... 2-69, 4-9 Key Release Button...... 2-15 Enhanced Traction System Warning Light. . . . 2-68, 4-10 Keys...... 2-2 ETS Active...... 2-69, 4-9 ETS Warning...... 2-68, 4-10

9-6 yellowblue

Interior...... 2-44 Short Trip/City Definition...... 7-5 Low Coolant Warning...... 2-70 Short Trip/City Intervals...... 7-5 Oil PressureR ...... 2-73 Maintenance, Underbody...... 6-55 Passlock Warning...... 2-74 Maintenance When Trailer Towing...... 4-41 Safety Belt Reminder...... 1-8, 2-65 Malfunction Indicator Lamp...... 2-70 Up-Shift...... 2-27, 2-74 Manual Front Seat...... 1-2 Loading Your Vehicle...... 4-32 Manual Lumbar Support...... 1-3 Locks Manual Remote Control Mirror...... 2-46 Door...... 2-4 Manual Transaxle...... 2-16 Ignition Transaxle Check...... 7-33 Check...... 7-31 Key Lock Cylinder Service...... 7-32 Fluid...... 6-22 Power Door...... 2-5 Gear Positions...... 2-25 Rear Door Security...... 2-5 Operation...... 2-25 Loss of Control...... 4-15 Shifting...... 2-25 Low Coolant Warning Light...... 2-70 Starting Your Engine...... 2-16 Lowering the Convertible Top Manually...... 2-57 Methanol...... 6-4 Lowering Your Convertible Top...... 2-50 Mirrors Lubricants and Fluids...... 7-37 Convex Outside...... 2-46 Lubrication Service, Body...... 7-32 Inside Day/Night Rearview...... 2-46 Manual Remote Control...... 2-46 Power Remote Control...... 2-46 Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts...... 6-63 Mobility Program...... 8-5 Maintenance Record...... 7-39 Mountain Roads...... 4-24 Maintenance Schedule...... 7-1 Multifunction Lever...... 2-35 Long Trip/Highway Definition...... 7-6 Long Trip/Highway Intervals...... 7-6 Owner Checks and Services...... 7-30 Neutral, Automatic Transaxle...... 2-22 Periodic Maintenance Inspections...... 7-35 Neutral, Manual Transaxle...... 2-26 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants...... 7-37 New Vehicle “Break-In”...... 2-13 Scheduled Maintenance Services...... 7-4 Night Vision...... 4-17

9-7 yellowblue

Odometer...... 2-64 Power Odometer, Trip...... 2-64 Door Locks...... 2-5 Off-Road Recovery...... 4-13 Option Fuses...... 6-58 Oil, Engine...... 6-12 Remote Control Mirror...... 2-46 Oil Pressure Light...... 2-73 Steering...... 4-10, 6-29 Overdrive, Automatic Transaxle...... 2-24 Steering Fluid...... 6-29 Overheating Engine...... 5-9 Windows...... 2-34 Owner Checks and Services...... 7-30 Power Outlet...... 2-48 Owner Publications, Ordering...... 8-11, 8-12 Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts...... 1-22 Problems on the Road...... 5-1 Publications, Service and Owner...... 8-11, 8-12 Paint Spotting, Chemical...... 6-55 Park Automatic Transaxle...... 2-21 Radio Reception...... 3-21 Shifting Into...... 2-29 Radios Shifting Out of...... 2-31 AM-FM Stereo...... 3-7 Parking AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape...... 3-9 At Night...... 2-11 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and ATC...... 3-11 Brake...... 2-28 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc and ATC...... 3-16 Brake Mechanism Check...... 7-34 Rain, Driving In...... 4-18 Lots...... 2-12 Raising the Convertible Top Manually...... 2-57 Over Things That Burn...... 2-32 Raising Your Convertible Top...... 2-56 With a Trailer...... 4-40 Rear Your Vehicle, Manual Transaxle...... 2-31 Door Security Locks...... 2-5 Passenger Position...... 1-23, 1-29, 1-36 Outside Seat Position...... 1-30 Passing...... 4-13 Safety Belt Comfort Guides...... 1-33 With aR Trailer...... 4-38 Seat Passengers...... 1-29 Passlock ...... 2-12 Window Defogger...... 3-5 Warning Light...... 2-74 Rear Turn Signal Bulb Replacement...... 6-38 Periodic Maintenance Inspections...... 7-35 Rearview Mirror...... 2-46

9-8 yellowblue

Reclining Front Seatbacks...... 1-4 Children...... 1-37 Recreational Vehicle Towing...... 4-29 Driver Position...... 1-14 Refrigerants, Air Conditioning...... 6-63 Extender...... 1-55 Remote Keyless Entry System...... 2-6 How to Wear Properly...... 1-13 Remote Trunk Release...... 2-11 Incorrect Usage. . . . . 1-18, 1-19, 1-20, 1-21, 1-53, 1-54 Removing the Boot...... 2-54 Lap Belt...... 1-36 Replacement Lap-Shoulder...... 1-14, 1-30 Bulbs...... 6-62 Larger Children...... 1-52 Parts...... 6-63 Passenger Position...... 1-23, 1-29, 1-36 Wheel...... 6-46 Questions and Answers...... 1-12 Replacing Safety Belts...... 1-55 Rear Comfort Guides...... 1-33 Reporting Safety Defects...... 8-10 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions...... 1-30 Restraints Rear Seat Passengers...... 1-29 Checking...... 1-55 Reminder Light...... 1-8, 2-65 Child...... 1-40 Replacing After a Crash...... 1-55 Head...... 1-5 Right Front Passenger Position...... 1-23 Replacing Parts After a Crash...... 1-55 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster...... 1-17 System Check...... 7-31 Smaller Children and Babies...... 1-37 Reverse, Automatic Transaxle...... 2-22 Use During Pregnancy...... 1-22 Reverse, Manual Transaxle...... 2-27 Why They Work...... 1-9 Right Front Passenger Position...... 1-23 Safety Chains...... 4-38 Roadside Assistance...... 8-6 Safety Defects, Reporting...... 8-10 Roadside Assistance, Canadian...... 8-7 Safety Warnings and Symbols...... vi Rocking Your Vehicle...... 5-31 Scheduled Maintenance Services...... 7-4 Rotation, Tires...... 6-42 Seatback Latches...... 1-5 Reclining Front...... 1-4 Safety Belt Extender...... 1-55 Seats Safety Belts...... 1-8 Easy Entry...... 1-6 Adults...... 1-13 Manual Front...... 1-2 Care...... 6-51 Manual Lumbar Support...... 1-3 Center Rear Passenger Position...... 1-36 Rear...... 1-7

9-9 yellowblue

Seats (Continued) Specifications, Engine...... 6-63 Restraint Systems...... 1-1 Speech Impaired, Customer Assistance...... 8-4 Seat Controls...... 1-2 Speedometer...... 2-64 Securing a Child Restraint...... 1-46, 1-48, 1-50 SRS...... 1-23 Second Gear, Automatic Transaxle...... 2-23, 2-24 Stains, Cleaning...... 6-50 Second Gear, Manual Transaxle...... 2-26 Starter Switch Check...... 7-32 Security System...... 2-12 Starting Your Engine...... 2-16, 2-17 Service...... 6-2 Steam...... 5-9 Bulletins, Ordering...... 8-11, 8-12 Steering...... 4-10 Manuals, Ordering...... 8-11, 8-12 In Emergencies...... 4-12 Parts Identification Label...... 6-57 Power...... 4-10, 6-29 Publications, Ordering...... 8-11, 8-12 Tips...... 4-11 Work, Doing Your Own...... 6-2 Wheel, Tilt...... 2-35 Service and Appearance Care...... 6-1 Storage Compartments...... 2-47 Service and Owner Publications...... 8-11, 8-12 Storage, Vehicle...... 6-34 Ordering in Canada...... 8-12 Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow...... 5-30 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle...... 1-29 Sun Visors...... 2-48 Sheet Metal Damage...... 6-55 Sunroof...... 2-49 Shift Lever...... 2-20, 2-25 Supplemental Restraint System...... 1-23 Shift Speeds...... 2-27 Surge Tank, Coolant...... 5-11 Shifting Surge Tank Pressure Cap...... 6-25 Automatic Transaxle...... 2-20 Symbols, Vehicle...... viii Into Park (P)...... 2-29 Manual Transaxle...... 2-25 Out of Park...... 2-31 Tachometer...... 2-64 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster...... 1-17 Taillamp Bulb Replacement...... 6-38 Signaling Turns...... 2-36 Tape Player Care...... 3-23 Skidding...... 4-15 Theft...... 2-11 Sound Equipment, Adding...... 3-22 Theft-DeterrentR Feature, CD Player...... 3-19 Spare Tire, Compact...... 5-29 THEFTLOCK ...... 3-19 Specifications and Capacities...... 6-62 Thermostat...... 6-25

9-10 yellowblue

Third Gear, Automatic Transaxle...... 2-24 Towing Third Gear, Manual Transaxle...... 2-26 From the Front...... 4-30 Tilt Steering Wheel...... 2-35 From the Rear...... 4-32 Time, Setting the...... 3-7 Recreational Vehicle...... 4-29 Tire Chains...... 6-47 Towing a Trailer...... 4-34, 4-41 Tire Loading...... 4-32 Towing Your Vehicle...... 5-8 Tire-Loading Information Label...... 4-32 Trailer Tires...... 6-40 Backing Up...... 4-39 Alignment and Balance...... 6-46 Brakes...... 4-38 Buying New...... 6-44 Driving on Grades...... 4-40 Chains...... 6-47 Driving with...... 4-38 Changing a Flat...... 5-19 Engine Cooling...... 4-41 Cleaning...... 6-54 Following Distance...... 4-38 Compact Spare...... 5-29 Hitches...... 4-37 Inflation...... 6-41 Maintenance When Towing...... 4-41 Inflation Check...... 7-30 Making Turns...... 4-39 Inspection and Rotation...... 6-42 Parking on Hills...... 4-40 Loading...... 4-32 Passing...... 4-39 Pressure...... 6-41 Safety Chains...... 4-38 Temperature...... 6-46 Tongue Weight...... 4-36 Traction...... 6-45 Total Weight on Tires...... 4-37 Treadwear...... 6-45 Towing...... 4-34, 4-41 Uniform Quality Grading...... 6-45 Turn Signals...... 4-39 Used Replacement Wheel...... 6-47 Weight...... 4-36 Wear Indicators...... 6-43 Transaxle Fluid Wheel Replacement...... 6-46 Automatic...... 6-18, 6-21 When It’s Time for New...... 6-43 Manual...... 6-22 Top Strap...... 1-45 Transmitters, Remote Keyless Entry...... 2-6 Torque Lock...... 2-30 Transportation, Courtesy...... 8-8 Torque, Wheel Nut...... 5-26, 6-62 Trip Odometer...... 2-64

9-11 yellowblue

TTY Users...... 8-4 Washing Your Vehicle...... 6-52 Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals...... 2-36 Weatherstrip Lubrication...... 7-31 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever...... 2-35 Weatherstrips...... 6-52 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer...... 4-39 Wheel Alignment...... 6-46 Nut Torque...... 5-26, 6-62 Underbody Flushing Service...... 7-34 Replacement...... 6-46 Underbody Maintenance...... 6-55 Used Replacement...... 6-47 Up-Shift Light...... 2-27, 2-74 Wrench...... 5-20 Windows Vehicle Auto-Down...... 2-34 Control...... 4-6 Manual...... 2-34 Damage Warnings...... vii Power...... 2-34 Dimensions...... 6-64 Windshield Washer Identification Number...... 6-57 Fluid...... 2-38, 6-29 Loading...... 4-32 Fluid Level Check...... 7-30 Storage...... 6-34 Windshield Wiper...... 2-37 Ventilation System...... 3-6 Blade Check...... 7-31 Visors, Sun...... 2-48 Blade Replacement...... 6-40 Fuse...... 6-58 Winter Driving...... 4-25 Warning Devices...... 5-3 Wiper Blades, Cleaning...... 6-51 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators...... 2-65 Wiring, Headlamp...... 6-58 Warranty Information...... 8-9 Wrecker Towing...... 5-8 Washer Fluid, Windshield...... 6-29 Wrench, Wheel...... 5-20

9-12